2025 PACIFICA OWNER’S MANUAL
This Owner Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This
manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install
them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore. This Owner Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date
Owner Handbook, Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehi-
cle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner Handbook for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................... 8
1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE.............................................................13
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL.................................108
3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING..........................................................................129
4
5 MULTIMEDIA ..........................................................................................................181
5
6 SAFETY....................................................................................................................212
6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY..............................................................................260
7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE................................................................ 283
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................... 332
9
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE...............................................................................340
10
11 INDEX......................................................................................................................345
11
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME..............................................................8
SYMBOLS KEY.......................................................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY..............................................9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ....................................13
Battery Conditioning...................................... 14
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION ............ 15
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet..............................15
AC Level 1 Charging (120 Volt, 12 Amp)...... 15
AC Level 2 Charging (240 Volt, 32 Amp)...... 22
Vehicle Charge Indicators............................. 23
Hybrid Electric App.........................................24
KEYS ................................................................... 26
Key Fob...........................................................26
SENTRY KEY........................................................28
IGNITION SWITCH................................................29
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition.......................29
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition — Hybrid
Models Only.............................................. 30
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED......................... 32
How To Use Remote Start............................. 32
To Exit Remote Start Mode........................... 33
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped................................................33
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped................................................... 33
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped...........................33
Remote Start Cancel Message..................... 34
REMOTE START SYSTEM (HYBRID) — IF
EQUIPPED.......................................................34
How To Use Remote Star
t............................. 34
To Exit Remote Start Mode .......................... 35
Scheduled Cabin Conditioning (SCC)........... 35
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 36
To Arm The System ....................................... 36
To Disarm The System...................................36
Rearming Of The System...............................37
Security System Manual Override.................37
DOORS.................................................................37
Manual Door Locks........................................37
Power Door Locks — If Equipped.................. 38
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry......... 38
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If
Equipped................................................... 40
Manual Sliding Side Door..............................40
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped.........41
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped......42
Child Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors................................................ 42
STEERING WHEEL ..............................................43
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column.................43
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped..........43
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED....44
Programming The Memory Feature..............44
Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Memory..................................................... 44
Memory Position Recall.................................45
SEATS ..................................................................45
Manual Adjustment Front Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 45
Manual Adjustment Rear Seats....................46
Power Adjustment Front Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 56
Power Adjustment Rear Seats — If
Equipped................................................... 58
Heated Seats................................................. 59
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped.....................60
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks.............60
Head Restraints............................................. 61
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF
EQUIPPED.......................................................63
Introducing Voice Recognition...................... 63
Basic Voice Commands.................................63
Get Started.....................................................63
Additional Information...................................63
MIRRORS.............................................................64
Inside Rearview Mirror.................................. 64
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped..... 64
Outside Mirrors.............................................. 64
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped............. 64
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped................................. 65
Conversation Mirror.......................................65
Power Mirrors — If Equipped......................... 65
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If
Equipped................................................... 65
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If
Equipped................................................... 66
2
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................... 66
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 66
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped...
66
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED......................67
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®...............................................67
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels......... 67
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device........... 67
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener..............................................67
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device...............................68
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................68
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming....... 69
Security...........................................................69
Troubleshooting Tips..................................... 69
EXTERIOR LIGHTS...............................................70
Multifunction Lever........................................70
Headlight Switch............................................70
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped....................................................71
High/Low Beam Switch................................. 71
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped............ 71
Flash-To-Pass .................................................71
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped.............71
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped... 72
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped.............72
Lights-On Reminder.......................................72
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped......................72
Turn Signals....................................................72
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............... 72
Battery Saver..................................................73
INTERIOR LIGHTS................................................73
Interior Courtesy Lights................................. 73
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS.................74
Windshield Wiper Operation..........................74
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped..............75
Rear Wiper And Washer................................ 75
CLIMATE CONTROLS .......................................... 75
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions........................................... 75
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions........................................... 80
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped................................................84
Climate Voice Commands............................. 84
Operating Tips ...............................................84
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT.............. 85
Storage........................................................... 85
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped................88
Sun Screens — If Equipped........................... 88
USB/AUX Control ...........................................88
Power Outlets ................................................90
Power Inverter — If Equipped ....................... 91
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped...........92
WINDOWS............................................................93
Power Windows..............................................93
Automatic Window Features......................... 93
Reset Auto-Up................................................ 94
Wind Buffeting............................................... 94
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED.............94
Opening And Closing The Sunroof................95
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade — If Equipped.......................... 95
Pinch Protect Feature....................................95
Venting Sunroof............................................. 95
Ignition Off Operation.................................... 96
Sunroof Maintenance....................................96
HOOD ..................................................................96
Opening.......................................................... 96
Closing............................................................ 97
LIFTGATE..............................................................97
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate........................ 97
To Lock/Close The Liftgate............................97
Power Liftgate — If Equipped.........................97
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped............... 98
Cargo Area Features......................................99
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED..104
Deploying The Crossbars............................ 105
Stowing The Crossbars................................106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER....................................108
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................109
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — HYBRID MODELS.. 111
Instrument Cluster Descriptions.................111
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....................112
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls........................................... 112
3
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off Soon.......113
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle As
Soon As Possible.................................... 114
Engine Oil Life..............................................114
Instrument Clust
er Display Menu Items ....114
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load
Reduction Actions — If Equipped...........119
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................ 120
Red Warning Lights..................................... 120
Yellow Warning Lights................................. 123
Yellow Indicator Lights................................ 126
Green Indicator Lights.................................126
White Indicator Lights................................. 127
Blue Indicator Lights................................... 127
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II......127
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity.......................................... 127
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .......................128
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE VEHICLE................................... 129
Normal Starting........................................... 129
AutoPark.......................................................129
Extended Park Starting............................... 131
If Engine Fails To Start................................ 132
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F
Or −30°C)............................................... 132
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine...132
To Turn Off The Engine Using The
ENGINE START/STOP Button................. 132
STARTING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID................. 132
Normal Starting........................................... 133
AutoPark.......................................................133
After Starting............................................... 135
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button................................135
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED.........136
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS........136
PARKING BRAKE...............................................136
Electric Park Brake (EPB)............................136
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................ 138
Ignition Park Interlock................................. 139
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System......................................... 139
9-Speed Automatic Transmission...............139
Gear Ranges................................................ 140
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — HYBRID...........142
Ignition Park Interlock................................. 142
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System..........................................143
Hybrid Transmission.................................... 143
Gear Ranges................................................ 143
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 145
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION......................... 145
POWER STEERING............................................ 145
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 146
Autostop Mode.............................................146
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop.................................................. 146
To Start The Engine While In Autostop.......146
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System.....................................................147
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System.....................................................147
System Malfunction.....................................147
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED.. 147
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).....................147
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..............................154
ParkSense Sensors..................................... 155
ParkSense Display.......................................155
ParkSense Warning Display........................158
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense............ 158
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System.....................................................158
Cleaning The ParkSense System................159
ParkSense System Usage Precautions...... 159
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED.............................................160
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System...................... 160
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation............................. 161
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 163
LaneSense Operation..................................163
Turning LaneSense On Or Off..................... 163
LaneSense Warning Message....................163
Changing LaneSense Status...................... 164
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 165
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 165
4
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED................... 167
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................ 168
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID...............168
VEHICLE LOADING ........................................... 170
Certification Label....................................... 170
TRAILER TOWING ............................................. 171
Common Towing Definitions........................171
Trailer Hitch Classification.......................... 172
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)........................... 173
Vehicle Loading Chart..................................174
Trailer And Tongue Weight...........................175
Towing Requirements .................................175
Towing Tips ..................................................177
TRAILER TOWING — HYBRID............................ 177
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME).............................................. 177
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle..................................................... 177
DRIVING TIPS.................................................... 179
Driving On Slippery Surfaces...................... 179
Driving Through Water ................................179
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................181
CYBERSECURITY ..............................................181
UCONNECT SETTINGS...................................... 181
Customer Programmable Features ...........182
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............ 202
Radio Operation.......................................... 203
Media Mode.................................................203
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED203
Overview.......................................................203
Getting Started............................................ 204
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment
with Fire TV built-in from the Front
Radio Screen.......................................... 204
Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment
with Fire TV built-in from the Rear
Screens................................................... 204
First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear
Screens)..................................................204
Alexa Voice Control......................................205
Listen Via Vehicle Speakers........................205
Quick Menu..................................................205
Parental Controls (Using the Rear
Screens)..................................................205
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing (Using
the Rear Screens)...................................205
Media Sources Input (Using the Front
Radio and Rear Screens).......................206
Voice Remote with Alexa.............................206
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in streaming (Using the Front
Radio and Rear Screens)....................... 207
Play A Blu-ray™ or DVD — If Equipped........208
Fire TV Apps/Games (Using the Rear
Screens)..................................................208
Using The Video USB Port...........................208
Play Video Games........................................208
Headphones Operation...............................209
Rear Climate Controls................................. 209
Legal & Compliance.................................... 211
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....211
Regulatory And Safety Information.............211
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES............................................212
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 212
Regenerative Braking System (RBS) -
Hybrid Models.........................................212
Audible Pedestrian Warning System.......... 213
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System......213
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..........................217
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped................................................. 217
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped........................ 220
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).. 223
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 225
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ..... 225
Important Safety Precautions.....................225
Seat Belt Systems ...................................... 226
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).... 234
Child Restraints .......................................... 243
SAFETY TIPS .................................................... 256
Transporting Passengers............................ 256
Transporting Pets ........................................257
Connected Vehicles.....................................257
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .............................................257
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle..................... 258
5
Exhaust Gas ................................................258
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .......................259
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................ 260
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED..... 260
JA
CKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED.................................................... 262
Preparations For Jacking ........................... 263
Jack And Spare Tire Location..................... 263
Equipment Removal....................................263
Jacking Instructions ................................... 264
Road Tire Installation..................................267
Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped..... 268
Return Inflatable Spare Tire....................... 269
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED................... 269
JUMP STARTING (GAS MODELS)...................... 274
Preparations For Jump Start (Gas
Models)....................................................274
Jump Starting Procedure (Gas Models)..... 275
JUMP STARTING (HYBRID MODELS)................ 276
Preparations For Jump Start (Hybrid
Models)....................................................276
Jump Starting Procedure (Hybrid Models). 277
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED.. 278
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 279
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 279
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE.............................280
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 280
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models.................... 282
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)............................................282
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)........................282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING.................................. 283
Maintenance Plan....................................... 283
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................286
3.6L Engine..................................................286
3.6L Engine — Hybrid.................................. 287
Checking Oil Level....................................... 288
Adding Washer Fluid................................... 288
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................... 288
Pressure Washing....................................... 289
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE.................................. 289
Engine Oil ....................................................289
Engine Oil Filter .......................................... 290
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................ 290
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................. 291
Air Conditioner Maintenance......................291
Body Lubrication .........................................293
Windshield Wiper Blades ...........................293
Exhaust System ..........................................296
Cooling System............................................296
Cooling System — Hybrid.............................298
Brake System ..............................................301
Automatic Transmission .............................302
Fuses............................................................303
Bulb Replacement ......................................312
TIRES................................................................. 313
Tire Safety Information ...............................313
Tires — General Information ...................... 319
Tire Types..................................................... 322
Spare Tires — If Equipped...........................323
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...................... 324
Snow Traction Devices................................ 325
Tire Rotation Recommendations................327
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...............327
Treadwear.................................................... 327
Traction Grades........................................... 327
Temperature Grades................................... 328
STORING THE VEHICLE.................................... 328
STORING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID...................328
BODYWORK.......................................................329
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........329
Body And Underbody Maintenance............329
Preserving The Bodywork........................... 329
INTERIORS ....................................................... 330
Seats And Fabric Parts................................330
Plastic And Coated Parts............................ 330
Leather Surfaces.........................................330
Glass Surfaces ............................................331
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 332
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................ 332
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . 332
Torque Specifications..................................332
FUEL REQUIREMENTS......................................333
3.6L Engine .................................................333
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 333
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...................... 333
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles...................................................334
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.... 334
6
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline............... 334
Materials Added To Fuel .............................334
Fuel System Cautions..................................334
FLUID CAP
ACITIES............................................ 335
FLUID CAPACITIES — HYBRID...........................335
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS ...................336
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS............ 336
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...........337
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — ELECTRIC
VEHICLE (EV) ...............................................338
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
HYBRID....................................................338
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
HYBRID....................................................339
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .................................... 340
Prepare For The Appointment.................... 340
Prepare A List.............................................. 340
Be Reasonable With Requests...................340
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 340
Roadside Assistance...................................340
FCA US LLC Customer Center..................... 341
FCA Canada Customer Care....................... 341
Mexico.......................................................... 341
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands..............341
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)............. 342
Service Contract.......................................... 342
WARRANTY INFORMATION...............................342
MOPAR® PARTS............................................... 342
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS........................ 342
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C..................................... 342
In Canada.....................................................343
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION.............................343
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS......... 343
GENERAL INFORMATION..................................343
7
INTRODUCTION
WELCOME
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details
of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you
should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information,
which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your
vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
8 INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating proce-
dures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on eas-
ier use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional informa-
tion on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information per-
taining to the topic.
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to
be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when
operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
page 120.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
page 120
Battery Charge Warning Light
page 120
Brake Warning Light
page 120
Door Open Warning Light
page 121
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
page 121
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
page 121
INTRODUCTION 9
1
Red Warning Lights
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
page 122
Hood Open Warning Light
page 122
Liftgate Open Warning Light
page 122
Oil Pressure Warning Light
page 122
Oil Temperature Warning Light
page 122
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
page 123
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
page 123
Vehicle Security Warning Light
page 123
Red Warning Lights
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service Warning Light
page 122
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
page 122
Limp Home Warning Light
page 122
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
page 123
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
page 123
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
page 123
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
page 123
10 INTRODUCTION
Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
page 124
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light
page 124
Fuel Level Sensor Fail Warning Light
page 124
LaneSense Warning Light
page 124
Low Fuel Warning Light
page 124
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
page 124
Service AWD Warning Light
page 124
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) Warning Light
page 124
Yellow Warning Lights
Service LaneSense Warning Light
page 125
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
page 125
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
page 125
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking
(PEB) OFF Indicator Light
page 126
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Detected Indica-
tor Light
page 126
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator
Light
page 126
INTRODUCTION 11
1
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
page 126
Front Fog Indicator Light
page 126
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 126
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
page 126
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
page 126
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
page 126
Max Regeneration Indicator Light
page 126
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
page 126
Green Indicator Lights
Plug Status Indicator Light
page 127
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
page 12
7
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
page 127
LaneSense Indicator Light
page 127
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
page 127
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
page 127
12 INTRODUCTION
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high voltage
battery that is used to power the electric powertrain
systems and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system.
The high voltage battery is located under the middle
section of the vehicle, below and in front of the second
row seating. The high voltage battery is maintenance
free and designed to last for the life of the vehicle.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits:
● Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
● Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately three percent of their charge per
month.
● Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which means
that you do not have to completely discharge them
before recharging, as with some other batteries.
● Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and
discharged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The high voltage battery service disconnect is located
under the access panel, in front of the second
row passenger seating. Only a qualified service
technician should access the high voltage battery
service disconnect.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service, see
an authorized dealer
.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver try to remove the high voltage battery
service disconnect. The high voltage battery
service disconnect is used when your vehicle
requires service by a qualified technician at
an authorized dealer
ship. Failure to follow this
warning can result in electrical shock, toxic
emissions, fire, and other hazards which can
cause death or serious injury including severe
burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness.
● The high voltage battery and battery case have
no parts that you or an unqualified technician
can service. Under no circumstances should you
or an unqualified technician open, disassemble,
penetrate, or tamper with the high voltage battery,
battery case, their cables, or connectors. Damage
to these components can result in electrical
shock, toxic emissions, fire, and other hazards
which can cause death or serious injury including
severe burns, respiratory injuries, and blindness.
You should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealership for any service or maintenance on
these high voltage components.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Y
our v
ehicle’s high v
oltage batt
er
y is designed t
o last
the lif
e of y
our v
ehicle. See an authorized dealer f
or
inf
ormation on the disposal of the batt
er
y if it should
req
uire replacement.
WARNING!
Your vehicle contains a sealed Lithium-ion high
voltage battery. If the battery is disposed of
improperly, there is a risk of electrical shock and toxic
emissions which can cause severe burns, respiratory
injuries, fires, and other hazards resulting in serious
injury or death. Bring the vehicle to your dealership
when the life of the battery is exhausted.
General Information
The vehicle is also equipped with a Battery
Management system that is designed to:
● Ensure safe operation
● Maximize driving range
● Maximize the life expectancy of the high voltage
battery
NOTE:
● During vehicle start up and shut down, a clicking
noise may be heard from within the vehicle. When
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, the high
voltage battery contactors inside the battery are
closed to make the stored electricity inside available
for vehicle use. After the vehicle is shut down, the
contactors open to electrically isolate the battery
from other vehicle systems. The clicking noise is the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
sound of these contactors as they open and close
during normal operation.
● The Audible Pedestrian Warning system will emit a
noise from the front of the vehicle when driving
forward at speeds below 22 mph (35 km/h). It will
also emit a noise from the rear of the vehicle when
in REVERSE, and from both the front and rear of the
vehicle when in NEUTRAL. For more information on
this system, see
page 213.
WARNING!
In the event of a collision:
● If your vehicle is still drivable, pull off to the
side of the road, when safe to do so, and place
the transmission in the PARK position, apply the
parking brake, and turn the vehicle off.
● Bew
are of any exposed high-voltage parts or
cables. To avoid electrical shock which can result
in serious injury or death, never touch wiring,
connectors, and other high-voltage parts, such as
the inverter unit and the Lithium-ion battery.
● Leaks or damage to the Lithium-ion battery may
result in a fire and toxic emissions which can
cause severe burns, respiratory injuries, and other
serious injuries or death. If you discover these
leaks, contact emergency services immediately.
Since the fluid leak may be Lithium Manganate
from the Lithium-ion battery, never touch the fluid
leak inside or outside of the vehicle. If the fluid
contacts your skin or eyes, wash these areas
immediately with a large amount of water and
(Continued)
WARNING!
obtain immediate medical attention to help avoid
serious injury.
● If a fire occurs in your vehicle, leave the vehicle as
soon as possible and contact emergency services.
Only use a type ABC, BC, or C fire extinguisher that
is meant for use on electrical fires. Using a small
amount of water, or the incorrect fire extinguisher
can result in serious injury or death from electrical
shock.
● If you are not able to safely assess the vehicle due
to vehicle damage, do not touch the vehicle. Leave
the vehicle and contact emergency services.
Advise first responders that this is a electric
vehicle.
● In the event of an accident that requires bodywork,
refer to an authorized dealership.
BATTERY CONDITIONING
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the v
ehicle to be plugged in.
If the ambient temperature is 5°F (-15°C) or below
at vehicle shut down, the instrument cluster will
display the message “Plug In Vehicle To Keep Battery
Conditioned”.
If the battery temperature is below -22°F (-30°C), or
131°F (55°C) or above, the vehicle will NOT start:
● If the vehicle is plugged in at these battery
temperatures, the instrument cluster will display
the message “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed”.
● If the vehicle is not plugged in at these battery
temperatures, the “Plug In Vehicle To Condition
Battery” will be shown in the instrument cluster
display.
● If the batt
ery temperature is below -27°F (-33°C),
the message “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed” will be displayed whether the
vehicle is plugged in or not.
NOTE:
● When the “Please Leave Key In RUN — Battery
Conditioning Needed” message is displayed, keep
the ignition in the RUN position for the battery to
recover. Place the ignition back in the OFF position
when the message disappears, and then start the
vehicle. When this message is displayed, do not
operate any air conditioning controls.
● Under these high or low temperatures, if the vehicle
is plugged in, and the ignition is in the OFF position,
the vehicle may “wake up” to precondition the high
voltage battery for use.
● It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged in
overnight when possible to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
The messages will only be displayed when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position and the high voltage
battery is not ready to provide propulsion power. The
message also displays if there is a failed attempt to
achieve READY state when the high voltage battery cell
temperatures are either too cold or too hot.
14 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 CHARGING INLET
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE J1772
charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC Level 1
(120 V), and AC Level 2 (240 V) charging.
Vehicle Charge Inlet
Open the charge port door by pushing near the rear
outer edge of the door, near the center to unlatch. To
close the charge port door, engage the door latch by
pushing on the rear outer edge near the center.
AC LEVEL 1 CHARGING (120 VOLT, 12
AMP)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 120 Volt AC,
SAE J1772 Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
(EVSE), also referred to as a Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE). AC Level 1 charging requires a conventional
NEMA 5-15R 120 Volt AC grounded wall outlet along
with the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) provided
with the vehicle.
WARNING!
Please be sure to follow these warnings. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death.
● Discontinue use of the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if the plug or outlet becomes
hot to the touch or if you notice any unusual odors.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in building structures that use fuse-based
circuit protection. Use only with electrical circuits
protected by circuit breakers.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
other devices are plugged into the same circuit.
● When unplugging the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) from the wall outlet, be sure to pull by the
plug, and not the cord.
● Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or drag the cord of
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE).
● Stop using the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) immediately if charging stops before it’s
completed when the plug or cord is moved or
adjusted.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
if the plug has a loose connection with the wall
outlet or if the wall outlet is damaged or rusted.
● If in any doubt about the wall outlet and/or circuit,
contact a qualified electrician.
● Do not use if a malfunction occurs or if the
Portable Charging Cordset has been damaged in
(Continued)
WARNING!
any manner. It is recommended that you contact
an authorized dealership.
● There are no user serviceable parts inside the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt
to repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE), doing so will void the New Vehicle
Warranty.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
WARNING!
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK: Electrical shock, fire, and other
serious hazards can occur if the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) is not used properly. This vehicle uses
a high voltage current. Failure to follow the proper
charging instructions in this publication can cause
serious injury or death. There are no serviceable
parts in the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
WARNING!
not open, disassemble, penetrate, or tamper with
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Failure to
follow this warning can result in electrical shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury.
To access the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE), open
the door of the cargo area storage bin if equipped,
on the driver’s side, and remove the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) from the storage bag.
NOTE:
After use, the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should
be placed in the storage bag and put back in the cargo
area storage bin if equipped. If the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) will be left outside the vehicle, be sure
to protect the connection end from moisture, dirt, and
debris accumulation and contamination.
Cargo Area Storage Bin
NO
TE:
The P
or
table Charging Cor
dse
t (EV
SE) is used f
or A
C
Le
v
el 1 charging only
.
WARNING!
This publication contains important instructions and
warnings that should be followed during charging
operations. Failure to follow these warnings and
instructions can result in electrical shock and fire
which can cause death or serious injury.
● Do not put fingers or objects into the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) connector.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
if the flexible power cord is frayed, broken, has
cracked insulation, or any other signs of damage.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if
the enclosure or the connector is broken, cracked,
open, or shows any other indication of damage.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
● The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) may
attempt to reset and run after a power
interruption.
● There are no user serviceable parts inside the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Do not attempt
to repair or service the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) yourself – personal injury may result.
● When using a charging station with the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) attached, ensure the
charging station’s cable is not visibly damaged
before plugging into the vehicle.
● Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is
(Continued)
WARNING!
mandatory when children are in proximity to the
charge station that is in use.
● Do not use a charge station or vehicle charge
inlet that is worn or damaged with the AC Level
2 charging cable. Plugging into worn or damaged
receptacles may cause damage to the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) and vehicle.
● Ensure that the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose
the EVSE J1772 vehicle connector to rain or wet
conditions. Avoid allowing water or other liquids
to pour or drip onto the vehicle connection end
of the J1772 EVSE connector. If water penetrates
the electrical device, the risk of electrical shock
increases. Ensure that all plugs and cables
are free of moisture before using the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE).
● In a collision, a loose Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) in the vehicle could cause injury. It could
fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone
in the vehicle. Do not store the Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) on the cargo load floor, or in the
passenger compartment.
● The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) has been
tested for use in temperatures ranging from -40°F
to 122°F (-40°C to 50°C).
● The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
stored at temperatures between -40°F and 176°F
(-40°C and 80°C).
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is compliant with
SAE J1772, and applicable for use with vehicles fitted
with standard SAE J1772 charge inle
ts. The Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) includes:
● A charge connector
● A NEMA 6 rated enclosure with a Charge Current
Interrupt Device (CCID) with a status indicator
display
● An AC Power Cord with a NEMA 5–15P right angle
plug
● An indoor/outdoor charge cable, EV-rated
● A Status Indicator Display
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
1 — Charge Cable
2 — Charge Connector
3 — Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Enclosure
4 — Status Indicator Display
5 — AC Plug
Grounding Instructions
For A Grounded, Cord-Connected Product:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) must be
grounded. If it should malfunction or break down,
grounding provides a path of least resistance f
or an
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock.
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is equipped
with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor
and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged
into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed
and grounded in accordance with all local codes and
ordinances.
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
on electrical circuits with two-prong outlets; use with
improper outlets could result in electric shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury. Check
with a qualified electrician if you are in doubt as to
whether the wall outlet is properly grounded. Do not
modify the plug prongs provided with the Portable
Charging Corset (EVSE) – if it does not fit the outlet,
you must have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
Installation And Operating Instructions
1. Always insert the AC plug prongs of the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a 15 A, or 20 A
, 120
VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall outlet first. Do not use
an extension cord, outlet/plug adapter, or a worn
outlet. The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) will
not operate safely unless it is plugged directly into
the wall outlet.
NOTE:
The Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) should be
plugged into a dedicated circuit, not a circuit
shared with other devices dra
wing electricity on
the circuit.
AC Plug And Wall Outlet
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
on electrical cir
cuits with two-prong outlets; use
with improper outlets could result in electric
shock, fire, property damage, and death or
serious injury. Check with a qualified electrician
if y
ou are in doubt as to whether the wall
outlet is properly grounded. Do not modify the
plug prongs provided with the Portable Charging
Corset (EVSE) – if it does not fit the outlet, you
must have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
2. Check to see if the Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) is ready to charge by reviewing the indicator
lights.
Portable Charging Cordset
(EVSE) Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Check Outlet Indicator Light
3. If the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is ready
to charge, ensure the vehicle is in PARK, and
then connect the charge connector to the vehicle’s
charge inlet. You will hear a “click” when the
charge connector is inserted correctly and coupled
with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the green
indicator light will turn on.
NO
TE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
● Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) — The
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) status
indicator lights illuminate green, red, or yellow
to identify the charging status
page 18.
● Wall Outlet — Check whether the wall outlet
is functional (no power outage) and/or plug
the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) into a
dif
ferent wall outlet.
● Charging Schedule — Check whether or not
the charging schedules have been enabled.
If enabled, check that you are within the
scheduled time and day of the week. If a
charging schedule has been enabled in the
vehicle, and it is outside the time and day of
the week, you may override the schedule for
this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the
double plug sequence within 10 seconds for it
to override the set schedule.
● Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open.
Charging is disabled while the hood is open,
and will resume when the hood closes.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle
first, and then from the wall outlet. To disengage
the vehicle coupler, push the button on the
connector.
6. Close the inlet door when a Portable Charging
Cordset (EVSE) is not connected to the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF
position while conducting Level 1 charging. This
minimizes any additional vehicle loads the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) has to support. The additional
electrical loads will extend the high voltage battery
charging time.
T
roubleshooting Using The Status
Indicator Display
If the vehicle is not charging properly, consult the status
indicator lights.
The Green LED signals correct operation of the system.
The Red LED signals a failure in the charging system.
The Yellow LED signals a failure with the outlet.
LED Indicator Lights
1 — Green LED
2 — Red LED
3 — Yellow LED
Any faults in charging are displayed by the LEDs, either
steady or flashing, located on the status indicator
display of the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE). Refer
to the following troubleshooting table.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
OFF OFF OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) not connected
to the domestic charging outlet or power failure
in the domestic power supply mains.
ON OFF OFF
There are no faults in the domestic power supply
mains, so the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
can be connected to the charge inlet on the vehi-
cle.
ON ON (Flashing) ON
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domes-
tic power supply mains.
When the normal temperature is reached, the
system will make a new charge attempt at a low-
er current level.
ON OFF ON (Flashing)
Charging to a lower current level due to overheat-
ing of the charging outlet of the domestic power
supply mains.
ON ON ON (Flashing)
Overheating at the charging outlet of the domes-
tic power supply mains.
Carefully disconnect the Portable Charging Cord-
set (EVSE) from both the vehicle and power out-
let and wait for the plug and outlet to return to
normal temperatures. Then, reconnect the Porta-
ble Charging Cordset (EVSE) to the power outlet
and vehicle and charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new
anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of
the domestic power supply mains.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts in total).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON ON (2 Blinks)
Lack of grounding cable in the charging outlet of
the domestic power supply mains.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehi-
cle and the outlet and reconnect it, then try to
charge again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new
anomaly.
ON (Flashing) OFF OFF
Domestic mains power incorrectly supplied. The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and
the outlet and reconnect it, then try to charge
again.
Contact a qualified electrician in case of a new
anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault trip
over one second after relay closure. Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) retrying to charge the
vehicle.
The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts in total).
ON ON OFF Charge Current Interrupt Device (CCID) fault, Re-
try Exhausted or Retry is disallowed if trips within
one second of relay closure.
The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehi-
cle and the outlet and reconnect it, then try to
charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a
new anomaly.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) Charging System Failure Troubleshooting
Green LED Red LED Yellow LED Description Action/Consequences
ON ON OFF
Dispersion of the electricity on the vehicle. Disconnect the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from the vehicle and the outlet and reconnect it,
then try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a
new anomaly.
ON ON (Flashing) OFF
Electric charging current too high. The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts total).
ON ON (7 Blinks) OFF
Electric charging current too high. The new charge attempt failed. Disconnect the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehi-
cle and the outlet and reconnect it, then try to
charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a
new anomaly.
ON ON (2 Blinks) OFF Charging abnormality on the vehicle. The system will make a new charge attempt after
30 seconds (6 attempts total).
If the fault persists, disconnect the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE) from the vehicle and
the domestic power outlet and reconnect it, then
try to charge again.
Contact an authorized dealership in case of a
new anomaly.
ON ON (3 Blinks) OFF
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) failure.
ON ON (4 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (5 Blinks) OFF
ON ON (6 Blinks) OFF
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
● Ensure the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is
positioned so it will not be stepped on, tripped over,
or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
● There are no user serviceable parts inside.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) if it
is visibly damaged. Contact an authorized dealership
for service.
● Do not place fingers, or any other objects inside the
charge connector.
● Do not allow children to operate the Portable
Charging Cordset (EVSE). Adult supervision is
mandatory when children are in proximity when the
Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE) is in use.
● Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an extension cord or plug adapters.
● Do not unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
from the wall outlet during a charging operation.
Charging Inlet Warning Label
1 — Risk Of Electric Shock
2 — Charging Procedure In Progress
3 — Dangerous Situation
4 — Reference Owner’s Information
5 — Charging Timer Set
6 — Charge Port Type Symbol
7 — Charging Procedure Complete
8 — Label Part Number
9 — Fault In Charging Procedure
NOTE:
During normal operation, the charge connector or AC
plug may feel warm. If either one feels hot during
charging, unplug the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
and have a qualified electrician inspect the wall outlet
before you continue charging
page 343.
WARNING!
Do not use the Portable Charging Cordset (EVSE)
with an outlet that is worn or damaged. Failure to
follow this warning can result in electrical shock, fire,
property damage, and death or serious injury.
AC LEVEL 2 CHARGING (240 VOLT, 32
AMP)
AC Level 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V, Level
2 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) charging
station. A 32 Amp Level 2 EVSE for home installation
is recommended. The Level 2 EVSE connects to a 40
Amp circuit breaker and delivers 32 Amp maximum to
the vehicle.
When using public charging stations, ensure the
charging station is ready to provide charge and the
vehicle is in PARK before the Level 2 EVSE is plugged
into the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear a “click”
when the charge connector is inserted correctly and is
coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If not,
please check the following:
● Charging Station — Check the indications and
instructions at the charging station.
● Charging Schedule — Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle
is currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override it
for this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it back
into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double
plug sequence within 10 seconds for it to override
the set schedule.
● Hood Ajar — Check whether the hood is open.
Charging is disabled while the hood is open, and will
resume when the hood closes.
To stop the charging process:
● Press the button located on the Level 2 EVSE vehicle
connector.
● Remove the connector from the vehicle charge inlet.
● Plug the charge handle into the Level 2 EVSE station
and coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not
leave the charging cord lying on the ground.
22 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Guidelines for preventing fire and electric shock:
VEHICLE CHARGE INDICATORS
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Display
There is a battery display indicator located on the
instrument cluster
. The battery display will indicate the
current State Of Charge (SOC) for the high voltage
battery; with the percentage value located to the right
of the symbol. When plugged in, the battery symbol also
indicates the battery level along with messages about
the charge or whether the system is waiting to charge
due to the charge schedule. These will appear unless
there is a charging fault. A green plug telltale will be
shown in the cluster, as well as applicable messaging
when charging.
High Voltage Battery Display
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display in the instrument
cluster, your vehicle is equipped with a visual SOC
indicator. The SOC indicator is made up of f
ive lights
that are mounted to the top center of the instrument
panel, which will illuminate when the vehicle is plugged
into the charging system.
State Of Charge Indicator
The SOC indicator provides a visual indication of the
high voltage battery’s charge status during charging. It
is also used to indicate a charging problem as well as
waiting for a scheduled charge to begin.
NOTE:
The lights scroll one at a time when the v
ehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/day
of the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to begin
charging.
In extreme hot or cold environments, the lights on
the SOC indicator may not illuminate. Charge status is
available in the instrument cluster display. In the event
of an error in the charging process, the outer two lights
will blink.
When the hood is open, the lights on the SOC indicator
will not be illuminated.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminat
ed
Percent Of Battery Charge
1st light blinks 0 – 20%
1st light on, 2nd light
blinks
21 – 40%
1st and 2nd lights on,
3rd light blinks
41 – 60%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd lights
on, 4th light blinks
61 – 80%
1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
lights on, 5th light blinks
81 – 99%
All 5 lights on 100%
Two out
er lights are
blinking
Indicates an error in the
charging process
Lights turn on one at a
time from left to right
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
Indicates system is wait-
ing for scheduled time in
charge schedule to begin
charging
All lights turn on, then
immediately turn off
Indicates a successful
plug-in
NOTE:
For each segment of lights illuminated indicating the
percent of battery charge, two different blink rates
are used. A blink rate of 1 second on/1 second off
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
indicates that the first half is charging. The blink
rate will increase to 0.5 second on/0.5 second off to
indicate that the second half is charging. When the
battery is fully charged, the blinking stops and the lights
remain illuminated as charging continues.
HYBRID ELECTRIC APP
Within the Uconnect system is the Hybrid Electric
App that allows you to see your vehicle’s power flow,
understand your driving history, and set a charging
schedule for your vehicle’s high voltage battery. To
access this App, press the Apps or Vehicle button on
the main menu bar of the radio’s touchscreen, and
locate the Hybrid Electric App. Accessing the app brings
you to a set of three pages: Power Flow, Driving History,
and Schedules.
Hybrid Electric App Location
P
o
w
er Flow
The P
o
wer Flo
w screen sho
ws the current po
w
er
readings f
or all of the f
ollo
wing:
● Engine - Sho
ws the amount of power (in kW) the
engine is generating. Based on vehicle operating
conditions, this power is used to: propel the vehicle,
provide passenger compartment heating, pow
er
vehicle electrical loads, and charge the high voltage
battery. Engine operation is controlled to maximize
fuel economy.
● Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
high voltage battery is currently providing/absorbing.
A negative kW indicates the vehicle’s high voltage
battery is charging.
● Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
Climate Control system is using to maintain the
current interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of the
arrows on the touchscreen.
Power Flow Screen
Driving History
The Driving History screen shows the miles (km) driven
in both Full Electric and Hybrid (battery and engine
powered) modes for both the previous week and the
current w
eek. The data is displayed in a bar graph:
Electric mode in teal and Hybrid mode in blue.
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same day
in Electric mode (battery only) are always shown below
miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode. When one day of the
week exceeds 100 miles (160 km) driven, the values
for miles (km) driven in Electric and Hybrid modes will
be listed above the bar graph in respective colors (teal
for Electric and blue for Hybrid).
Driving History Screen
Charging Schedule
T
o set a charging schedule, select the Hybrid Electric
App in the touchscreen and follow these steps:
24 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Select “Schedules”.
Schedules Screen
2. Select the schedule to be set (1, 2, or 3) by
pressing the appropriate arrow on the right side
of the screen.
3. Select “Charge Schedule”.
Select Charge Schedule
4. Select if Scheduled Charging should “Charge Until
Full”.
5. Set the Charge Start Time: Hours, Minutes, and
AM/PM.
NOTE:
This is to occur every week (as long as the v
ehicle
is connected to an EVSE).
Set Charge Schedule
6. When done, press the X in the upper right hand
corner, then select “yes” to save the charge
schedule. The active schedule will be indicated by
the check mark to the right of the schedule event
line. The ev
ent action and time will be displayed.
7. To add another Scheduled Charging event, repeat
these steps.
NOTE:
A maximum of three independent Scheduled
Charging events can be scheduled at a given time.
NOTE:
● If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the
vehicle.
● If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect system (and Charge
Until Full is not selected), the vehicle’s battery will
not charge. Charging will only begin immediately if
the v
ehicle is plugged in within the time and day of
the week set in the schedule. Otherwise, charging
will automatically begin when the selected charge
time/day of the week occurs or whenever the vehicle
is plugged in with no charge schedule set.
● If the v
ehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks
the driver if they would like to “Charge Now?”
and provides other information, including the next
charging schedule start time and estimated time
to charge the battery to 100%. If within one hour
of selecting “Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a
powered EVSE, the vehicle will immediately begin
to charge (temporarily ignoring any set charge
schedule). To fully deactivate the charge schedule,
refer to the “Schedules” feature within the Hybrid
Electric App.
● The charging schedule can also be overridden if an
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged
in a second time to the vehicle. This “double
plug sequence” will override the schedule that is
set in the radio, and begin charging the vehicle
immediately. The double plug sequence must be
completed within 10 seconds for it to override the
programmed schedule.
● If “Charge Until Full” is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charging
immediately, and continue charging until the vehicle
is fully charged, you can select the “Charge Now”
option or use the double plug override option.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
NOTE:
For information on jump starting your vehicle,
page
276.
e-Save
The fourth screen within the Hybrid Electric App is the
e-Save screen. From this screen, you can specify the
behavior of the e-Save drive mode:
e-Save Screen
● Batt
er
y Sa
v
e - Maintains the high v
oltage Stat
e of
Charge (SOC) at its current le
v
el under most driving
scenarios.
● Batt
er
y Charge - Uses additional po
w
er fr
om the gas
engine t
o increase the high v
oltage SOC, up t
o 40%,
60%, or 80% capacity.
Charge Settings — If Equipped
The fifth screen within the Hybrid Electric App is the
Charge Setting screen. From this screen, you can select
the rate at which your vehicle charges.
Charge Setting Screen
The Charge Setting can be adjusted by pressing the
numbered buttons, and the estimated time until full
charge will update on the right side of the screen to
reflect the selected Charge Setting. The display also
shows information related to:
● Battery Level — Indicates, in percentage, the high-
voltage battery SOC.
● Estimate time to 100% — Corresponds to the time
required to obtain full recharging of the high-voltage
battery.
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports
Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped),
and remote power liftgate operation. The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, optional
po
wer liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power
sliding door, from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). When any button on the key fob is pushed, or
when any signal is being transferred between the key
fob and the vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will
flash as an indicator. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in
the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become
depleted. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the
emergency key with you when valet parking.
NOTE:
● The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the
key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device. This may result in poor
performance.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
page 92.
● With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
26 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — Panic Alarm
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low ke
y fob battery can be verified
by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display
directions to follow.
NOTE:
● A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the
LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no
longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, then
the key fob battery requires replacement.
● The key fob LED light brightness is designed f
or
indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be
visible in direct sunlight
page 343.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once
to unlock the driver’s front door and sliding door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and the liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash
and the horn will chirp. Settings in the Uconnect system
can change to lights only, chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will unlock
again only if the key fob is inside the passenger
compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings
page 181.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN
or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along
with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
● The doors have to be open and then closed in order
for the vehicle to detect a key fob. The Key Left
Vehicle feature will activate when the first door is
closed and no key fob is detected in the vehicle. If
the warning has been activated, and the other doors
are closed, no other warnings will be issued.
● These alerts will not be activated in situations where
either the vehicle’s engine is left running with the
key fob inside, or the key fob’s wireless signals are
blocked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
● Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin
battery dimensions.
● Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old
batteries by placing them in correct containers
according to the law or by taking them to a
dealership, where they will be handled appropriately.
● Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
● Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the
back housing or the printed circuit board.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of the key
fob with your thumb and then pulling the key out
with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat-blade screwdriver into the
now exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides
to disengage the snaps. Gently remove the back
cov
er from the fob, being careful not to damage
any of the snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward
in its pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove
the depleted battery from the battery pocket and
dispose appropriately.
4. Fit a new battery ensuring that the positive (+) side
is facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket
until it is firmly seated in place and secured under
both tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position and
snap it back in place by pushing it against the fob
until it is seated all around.
WARNING!
● The int
egrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hour
s and
can lead to death.
● If you think a battery may have been swallowed
or placed inside any part of the body, seek
immediate medical attention.
● Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close
securely, stop using the product and keep it away
from children.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Once a ke
y fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another
vehicle.
● Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
WARNING!
● Alw
ays remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when e
xiting the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been
pr
ogrammed.
NOTE:
● When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
● Emergency keys must be ordered to the correct key
cut to match the vehicle locks.
● It is not mandatory to replace the key fob if a new
emergency key is needed, and vice versa.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine.
The system does not need to be armed or activated.
Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key
28 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb
check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. If a valid key
fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with
the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut
off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced
as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security pro
tection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
page
343.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START,
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
● The engine is stopped
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm,
etc.) are still available
ACC
● The engine is stopped
● Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windows)
ON/RUN
● Driving position
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
START
● The engine will start (when foot is on the brake
pedal)
The engine only runs with the ignition in the ON/RUN
ignition position, or from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key
fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
OFF
Backup Starting Method
WARNING!
● When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Nev
er leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
● The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal
and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from
starting the vehicle.
● For the proper engine starting procedure, see
page 129.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION —
HYBRID MODELS ONLY
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob
is in the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in READY state (vehicle
running) with the gear selector in the PARK position
for 30 minutes, it will automatically turn off the
vehicle. Notifications have been designed into this
feature to raise awareness of the timed event. The
instrument cluster display will display “Ready To Drive”
accompanied with three audible chimes while exiting.
The interior warnings will occur regardless of whether
the key fob remains in the vehicle or is removed. The
horn will sound three times if the fob is removed from
the vehicle and the ignition state is in READY mode.
To restart the vehicle, follow the normal process for
starting your vehicle.
The START/STOP ignition button has four operating
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START,
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE:
● Pushing the START/STOP ignition button may only
activate the Electric Propulsion System and not start
the vehicle’s engine (if running the engine is not
currently required by the Hybrid system). READY will
show in the instrument cluster display whenever the
vehicle is operating in Electric mode and the vehicle
is stationary.
● If the vehicle’s ignition is in either ACC or ON/RUN,
the vehicle charge indicator may not display a value
greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle
loads.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
The ignition can be placed in the following positions:
OFF
● The vehicle is stopped
● Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm
system, etc.) are still available
ACC
● Some electrical devices are available (e.g. power
windo
ws)
● Mechanical power (vehicle propulsion) is not
available
ON/RUN
● Driving position
● All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, etc.)
● As long as the READ
Y appears in the instrument
cluster display, it does not matter if the engine is
running, vehicle propulsion is available
NOTE:
Vehicle propulsion is only av
ailable after the vehicle has
passed through the START position.
Conditions Which May Cause The Engine To Run
● While maintaining the Hybrid Battery State of Charge
(SOC)
● When applying maximum vehicle acceleration
● When maximum passenger compartment heating
has been turned on
● While maintaining the Exhaust System Catalyst
Temperature (after engine start in current ignition
cycle - emissions requirement)
● When the engine is temporarily operating in Fuel and
Oil Refresh Mode
● When the hood is open with the ignition in ON/RUN,
post-START mode (eliminates unexpected engine
start-ups)
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of the button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key
fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
WARNING!
● When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never lea
ve children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for theft. Always
turn the vehicle off, remove the key fobs from the
vehicle, and lock all the doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed
in the RUN position with an EVSE connected to the
vehicle, the instrument cluster display will not display
the READY state. When the Electric Vehicle Supply
Equipment (EVSE) is unplugged from the vehicle, the
vehicle will go into the READY state. If the vehicle is not
shifted out of PARK 30 minutes after being unplugged,
the vehicle will disable the READY state and transition
the ignition to OFF.
For more information on normal starting, see
page
132.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range
page 343.
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Star
t system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
HO
W TO
U
SE
R
EMO
TE
S
TAR
T
Push and release the R
emo
t
e Star
t butt
on on the k
e
y
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down after 10
seconds.
● The parking lights will turn on, and remain on, during
Remote Start mode.
● F
or security, power window and power sunroof (if
equipped) operation are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a thir
d cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Liftgate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● Battery at an acceptable charge level
● Panic button not pushed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security Light flashing
● Ignition in OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
32 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other contr
ols could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMO
TE
START
M
ODE
To driv
e the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with
another push and release of the Remote Start button
on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
● For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote
Start Active — Push Start Button” will show in the
instrument cluster display until you push the START/
STOP ignition button.
● To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST ACTIVATION
— IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system
will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes
or less. The timing is dependent on the ambient
temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will
automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defroster will automatically turn on in cold weather
conditions. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed in the
Comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings
page 181. In warm weather, the driver vented seat
feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is
activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a rear climate system,
it
will remain off to allow for optimal front row
performance.
● In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the climate settings will default to maximum heat,
with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost
timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
● In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
● In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above,
the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level
mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
page 75.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit the automatic defaults, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote
Start mode. This includes turning the climate controls
off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER
ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on
the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
● Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
● Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
● Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
● Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
● Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
● Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
● Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays active
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START SYSTEM (HYBRID) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Remote Start while the vehicle is plugged in may not
always start the engine.
This system uses the key fob to start
the vehicle conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The
system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Start system also activates the Climate
Control system and vented seats (if equipped) in
temperatures above 80°F (26.7°C). It activates
the optional heated seats, optional heated steering
wheel, optional heated mirrors and rear defroster in
temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will
lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp
twice (if programmed). Then, the vehicle will start, and
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
vehicle off.
NOTE:
● With Remote Start, the vehicle will only run for 15
minutes.
● Remote Start can only be used twice.
● If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
● The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
● For security, power window and power sunroof (if
equipped) operations are disabled when the vehicle
is in Remote Start mode.
● The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated
for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
v
ehicle will remote start:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors closed
● Hood closed
● Liftgate closed
● Hazard switch off
● Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
● 12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
● Key fob Panic button not pushed
● System not disabled from previous Remote Start
event
● Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
● Ignition in the OFF position
● Fuel level meets minimum requirement
● Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off while vehicle
is in propulsion system active
● Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light is not
illuminated
● Electric Vehicle Service Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
● Do no
t start or run an engine in a closed garage
or confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
(Continued)
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
● Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of
the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button one time or
allow the Remo
te Start cycle to complete the entire 15
minute cycle.
In addition, the ignition can be cycled to the RUN
(Pre-Propulsion System Active) position by pressing the
ignition button with the key fob in the vehicle, and then
pushing the ignition button one more time to place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
temporarily disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
SCHEDULED CABIN CONDITIONING (SCC)
This feature allows the driver to pre-condition (warm
up or cool down) the passenger cabin based on a
planned departure time. The target temperature is
preset to the same values used by the Remote Start
feature. Unlike Remote Start, the driver does not need
to initiate the cabin conditioning by pushing the Remote
Start button, instead, a programmed departure time
will be used. Also, all scheduled cabin conditioning
will be powered by the vehicle’s high voltage battery
working in conjunction with any EVSE connected to the
vehicle. Unlike Remote Start, in SCC the vehicle’s gas
engine will not start to provide power or heat for cabin
conditioning.
In order to conserve the vehicle’s high voltage batt
ery
power, the driver can choose between allowing the
battery to be drained of power down to <1%, or to
stop the SCC when the high voltage battery has been
depleted to 25% State Of Charge (SOC). The battery
percentages are displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
A maximum of two independent schedule event timers
are available for use by the SCC feature and Scheduled
Charging feature for charging the high voltage battery.
The timers may be used in any combination for SCC
and Scheduled Charging, but only two total timers are
available.
The SCC event times are used to wake up the vehicle
so that the Climate Control system can condition the
passenger cabin prior to the scheduled departure
time. Based on vehicle operating conditions, ambient
temperature, and the next programmed departure
time, the vehicle will determine when to begin cabin
conditioning. Cabin conditioning can begin up to
30 minutes prior to the scheduled departure time,
provided the stated high voltage battery conditions are
met.
The SCC will continue for a maximum of 15 minutes
after the scheduled departure time.
Once a scheduled event has been created, it can be
applied to one or more days of the week. The scheduled
event can also be set to occur only during the current
week, or repeat every week until the feature is turned
off or the event is changed.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
vehicle will initiate a scheduled SCC event:
● Gear selector in PARK
● Doors Closed
● Hood Closed
● Rear Compartment Closed
● Hazard switch off
● 12 Volt battery at an acceptable charge level
● Key fob not located inside the vehicle
● Ignition in the OFF position
● Remote Start has not been activated
Scheduling An SCC Event:
1. Select the Electric Vehicle App on the touchscreen.
2. Select “Schedules”.
Schedules Screen
3. Choose “Climate Schedules”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
4. Select one of two Climate Schedules by pressing
the appropriate arrow on the right side of the
touchscreen.
5. Select if SCC should stop when the high voltage
battery drops to 25% or lower.
6. Set the Manual Climate Schedule Departure Time:
Hours, Minutes, and AM/PM or set the Auto
Climate Schedule Departure Time: Hours, Minutes,
AM/PM, and Temperature.
Set Manual Climate Schedule
Set Auto Climate Schedule
7. Select the days that this SCC event will occur. The
“Repeat” indicator illuminates to indicate that SCC
will occur every week on the selected day(s), at the
selected time.
If you uncheck the “Repeat” option, all the days
of the week will be grayed out and the vehicle
will perform only one SCC event, which will occur
at the next available time that matches the SCC
event time (regardless of what day it was originally
set to occur before “Repeat” was unchecked).
8. To schedule another SCC event, press the X and
repeat these steps.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated,
the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors
and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
system provides both audible and visible signals. If
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the parking lights and/or
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
● For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
● Push lock on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
● Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob available
in the same exterior zone
page 38.
● Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any
of the following methods:
● Push the unlock button on the key fob.
36 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
page 38.
● Hands-Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation (if
equipped).
● Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
○ For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
— Passive Entry, push the START/STOP ignition
button (requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
● The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
● The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will
not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
● When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock the
doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain
in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn
off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between
cycles and up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active)
and then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL D
OOR LOCKS
To lock each door, rotate the door lock on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear
doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator
is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock
Manual Rear Door Lock
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
If the door lock is in the locked position (no ribbing
is visible) when y
ou shut the door
, the door will lock
.
Theref
ore, mak
e sure the k
e
y f
ob is no
t inside the
v
ehicle bef
ore closing the door
.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
● F
or personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
● Never use the PARK position as a substitute
f
or the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC
or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking your k
ey fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound
if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a
door is open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the
OFF position and remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE ENTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
● Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
the Uconnect system
page 181.
● The key fob may not be detected by the Passive Entry
system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop,
or other electronic device; these devices may block
the k
ey fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive
Entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
● If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entr
y will initiate illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate light, parking
lights) for the duration of 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn
signals.
● If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing,
or there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
● The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
handle.
● If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system (if
equipped).
● The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the
outside using the hands-free or Passive Entry
system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing
the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver’s side
doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. Grabbing the
front passenger door handle will unlock all four doors
and the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked.
38 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
● Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
page 181.
● All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock pref
erence setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is
equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
● A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a
door is open.
● A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
● A lock req
uest is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
det
ects a key fob inside the car, and it does not detect
any key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle,
and no valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are met:
● The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
● Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
● There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob
can be locked in the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the
door handle lock button to lock all four doors and the
liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
● After pushing the door handle lock button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle.
This is done to allow y
ou to check if the vehicle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
is locked by pulling the door handle, without the
vehicle unlocking.
● If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-
Safe)" remains active/functional.
● The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key
fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push
the electronic liftgate release handle for a power open
on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the
electronic liftgate handle and lift for manual liftgate
vehicles
page 343.
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT — IF
EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the gear selector has been placed
into the PARK position, af
ter the vehicle has been
driven (the gear selector has been placed out of PARK
and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the door
locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect
system
page 181.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or
the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to
open the sliding door. The sliding door inside handle
functions by rocking forward and back. Rocking the
handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward
releases the hold open latch in order to close the door.
NOTE:
If equipped with power sliding doors, using the manual
door handle will activate the power opening/closing
function. Allow the door to open or close fully on its
own, without forcing it.
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
To keep your door operating properly, observe the
following guidelines:
● Always open the door smoothly.
● Avoid high impacts against the door stop when
opening the door. This is very important when y
our
vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide
faster in the downhill direction.
● There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the
fuel door is open. If attempted, a message will appear
in the instrument cluster display, and the door will
automatically return to the closed position.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR — IF EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or closed
in several ways:
● Key fob
● Inside or outside handles
● Buttons located:
○ In the overhead console
○ Just inside the sliding door
○ On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open, close, or reverse a
power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the door when the door is locked. All other
ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pushing the
button on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if
equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door, with a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
There is a power sliding side door switch located on the
B-pillar trim panel on the driver’s and passenger’s side,
just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat
passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the handles
or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, push the po
wer sliding door
power off button, located in the overhead console, to
remove power to the handles and buttons just inside
the sliding doors. The power off LED, in the overhead
console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When
the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power off
button will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
● If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will
automatically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets
sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with
sliding door movements.
● If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it will power open on the next command.
Power Sliding Side Door Switch (Left Side Shown)
WARNING!
● P
ersonal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure
the door path is clear before closing the door.
● Before driving off, check the instrument cluster
for a sliding door or door open message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the sliding door open while
driving.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
HANDS-FREE SLIDING DOORS — IF
EQUIPPED
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight
in and out kicking motion, move your foot from side to
side, or in a sweeping motion, under the vehicle in the
general location below the door handle(s).
Activation Zone
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding
door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the
sliding door will open almost instantaneously. This
assumes all options are enabled in the Uconnect
Settings.
NOTE:
● To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a
valid Passiv
e Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not
within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any
kicks.
● The Hands-Free Sliding Doors will only operate when
the gear selector is in PARK.
● With e
very movement of the Hands-Free Sliding
Doors, an audible tone will sound and the turn
signals will flash. You can turn these alerts on or
off in the Uconnect system
page 181.
● If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will
automatically rever
se to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets
sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with
sliding door movements.
● If the power sliding doors encounter multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the system will
automatically stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off
through Uconnect Settings
page 181.
NOTE:
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned
off during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle service.
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM —
REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the
vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
● After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed t
o make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the locked position.
● After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the sliding
door closed to make certain the Child Protection
Door Lock is in the unlocked position.
● The inside door handle will not open the sliding door
when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.
● The power sliding door will operate from the switch
located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the
Child Protection Door Lock lever position.
● To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door
Power Off button, located in the overhead console.
When the overhead console power OFF LED is
illuminated, the sliding door may not be power
opened or closed by pushing the buttons just inside
the sliding doors or pulling on the handles.
42 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened
from the inside door handle when the Child
Protection Door Locks are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage the
Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection
Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with
the sliding door closed to make certain the Child
Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The
inside door handle will open the sliding door when the
Child Protection Door Lock is disengaged.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever
is located left of the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
mov
e the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column,
pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push
the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
A
djusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that
helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated st
eering wheel has been turned on, it will
stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated
steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located within
the Uconnect system and, if equipped, on the
instrument panel below the radio. You can access the
button through the Climate or Contr
ols menu of the
touchscreen.
● Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
● Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 33.
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of adv
anced age, chr
onic illness,
diabet
es, spinal cor
d injur
y
, medication, alcohol
use, e
xhaustion, or o
ther ph
ysical conditions
must e
x
er
cise care when using the st
eering
wheel heat
er. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
● Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type of material. This
may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
settings for the following features:
● Driver’s seat
● Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
● Side mirrors (if equipped)
● A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
● Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can
be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
● Memory settings will be linked to the driver profiles
in the Uconnect system, in addition to several other
features (radio presets, home screens, settings,
navigation, phone, etc.)
page 181.
The Driver Memory Settings switch is located on the
driver door, next to the door handle, and consists of
three buttons:
● The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
● The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Switch
1 — Memory Profile Button 1
2 — Memory Profile Button 2
3 — Set Button
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Sa
ving a new memory profile will erase the selected
profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and
radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2)
within five seconds. The instrument cluster display
will show which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE KEY FOB TO
MEMOR
Y
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through
the Uconnect Settings
page 181.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and then, within
10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
● The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to 5
mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall
is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displa
yed in the
instrument cluster display.
● Memory settings can be linked to driver profiles
in the Uconnect system. Changing driver profiles
will also recall the linked memory settings if the
conditions are met
page 181.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button (1 or 2) on the driver's
door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons on the driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or
2). When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat stops
moving. A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
NOTE:
Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory
mirror recall.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
● It is danger
ous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely t
o be seriously injured or killed.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
park
ed.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward.
The manual seat adjustment handle is located under
the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move for
ward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
WARNING!
● Seats should be adjust
ed before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pump the lever upward t
o raise the seat height or pump
the lever downward to lower the seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the recline
lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
park
ed.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment —
Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move for
ward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
f
orward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against y
our chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If
Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is
foldable and removable for added cargo space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
The release strap is located on the front of the seat,
near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release
strap to release the rear latches. The seat assembly
can now be removed from the vehicle by moving it in
a rear
ward direction from the detent positions in the
floor.
Release Strap
NOTE:
The seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat
stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent
positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the
seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
P
ersonal injuries could result.
Fold-Flat Quad Seats And Stow ‘n Go
Seats
NOTE:
● You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply
unf
olding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion may return to its normal shape.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Having an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging
the fabric by hand may smooth away any excess
wrinkling.
● Permanent wrinkles may still result.
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward
position and push the seatback forward until it rests on
the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
● The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position. Use
the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
● If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when returning
the seat to the original position, the headrest must
be folded back to the original position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy
entry into the third row with or without a child seat
installed.
1.
Located in the seatback of the second row seat
is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats) that
provides easier access to the third row by tilting
the seat forward.
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the
handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access
the third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position, just
pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into
position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injur
y or death may occur.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility
for passengers to enter and exit the third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat
by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part
of the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make
sure the arm rests are folded up.
Recliner Lever
2. To put it back into position, pull the recliner handle
on the bottom part of the seat then pull up on
the folded seat and make sure that it locks into
position.
NOTE:
Do not use the Easy Tilt Seat Lever to put the seat
back in the upright position. Only recliner handle
should be used to put the seat in the upright
position.
Exit F
or Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third
row passengers can pull on the strap and push the seat
forward for folding the seatback down and tilting the
seat t
o the floor for an easy exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat installed.
Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed.
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not eq
uipped with the Stow
‘n Go feature, are removable for added cargo space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat
against the seat cushion.
Lift Recline Lever And Fold Seatback Flat
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is
in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor.
Seat Release Strap
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
Tilt Seat Forward
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from the
vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge located near
the head restraint and the grab the bar on the rear
side of the seat cushion for easy removal.
Seat Removal
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted forward,
align the seat’s front attachments into the detent
positions on the floor.
In Floor Seat Detents
Installing Seat
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its
original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and re
turn the seat back to
the seating position.
50 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become loose.
Personal injuries could result.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
NOTE:
● You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by sim
ply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion may return to its normal shape.
Having an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging
the fabric by hand may smooth away any excess
wrinkling.
● Permanent wrinkles may still result.
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide and
pushing the head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of
the storage bin and push the seat forwar
d until the
anchors latch.
Assist Straps
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to
its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
● In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
● Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Alwa
ys make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the floor
for convenient storage.
AUT
O ADVANCE ‘N RETURN — IF EQUIPPED
On v
ehicles eq
uipped with the A
uto A
dv
ance ‘n Re
turn
f
eature, the fr
ont seat will mo
v
e f
or
w
ard automatically
to a location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n
Go seat movement, without interference by the front
seat. After the second row seat is stowed, the front seat
will move back to the previous location once the Auto
Advance ‘n Return button is pushed again.
The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to
both the front driver and passenger power seats (if
equipped).
WARNING!
During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not
occupied and the seat travel path is clear when
operating the power seat.
A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is located
on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power
sliding door.
Auto Advance ‘n Return Button (Left Side Shown)
Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature
NOTE:
● The button is only functional when the power sliding
door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door
is not open or the v
ehicle is not in PARK when the
button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a
message will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
● If the power sliding door is closing when the button is
pushed, the front seat will not move and a message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
● The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not function
if the front doors are open.
1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button.
2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat
movement
page 53.
3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button a second time. The front seat cushion
52 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
and seatback will return to the original starting
location.
NOTE:
● To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push
the Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or push the
front power seat button to stop the seat movement.
Pushing the Auto Advance ‘n Return button again will
return the front seat to the original starting location.
● The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes
obstacle detection. When the system detects an
obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direction, and
return to the previous location. A message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that an
obstacle has been detected.
● If the front seat is already in a location that will
allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat,
the front seat will not move and a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
● If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will
automatically recalibrate when the Auto Advance ‘n
Return button is pushed. This may result in the
seat cushion moving forward and downward, before
moving to the location that will allow space for the
second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement.
SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO
For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move
the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar. Move the seatback all the way forward
using the recliner handle located on the outboard
side of the cushion. Move the seat height to at least
mid position using the height adjuster handle in the
outboard side of the cushion.
For Power Seats: Push the A
uto Advance ‘n Return
button located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped)
page 52.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat
(if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked
position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
● Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked
position.
● Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked
position.
● For information on st
orage bin function with the
seats rearward
page 86.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down, and rest it
against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Remove the plastic storage bin (if equipped) from
the storage area, and store in a safe location.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by
grabbing the strap on the lower part of the
seatback, and guide the seat into the storage area.
Pull Strap
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat into
the storage area.
Push To Lock
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards
by the bottom corner edge of the panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
st
orage bin co
v
er
s are no
t pr
operly latched:
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
● Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
● The storage bin cover must be latched and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover.
● Do not sit on the second row seat when it is
in the st
owed position with the seatback upright
otherwise damage to the seat may occur.
TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS
For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor,
move the front seat all the way forward using the
manual seat adjustment bar
.
For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return
button located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped)
page 52.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor
mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the
unlocked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
● Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked
position.
● Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second ro
w seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front
seats while folding the top half down and rest it
against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat
out of the storage area. Push the seat rearward
making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the
seatback into the upright position and pull the
headrest up.
NOTE:
If the seatback is lock
ed, it will be necessary to
use the recliner handle to unlock the back before
f
olding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the storage
area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its original
state, grab the bottom corner and extend it
outward.
Extend Panel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it
clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the
floor mat (if equipped).
WARNING!
● In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could
be injured if seats are not properly latched to their
floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are
fully latched.
● Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Always make sure the head
restraints are in their upright positions when the
seat is to be occupied.
POWER ADJUSTMENT FRONT SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
Some models may be eq
uipped with eight-way power
seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the seat.
The switches control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
● Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward
by using the seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat U
p Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat
switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired position is
reached.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do no
t ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
im
pede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped b
y an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Power Lumbar Switch Location
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a four way
lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar switch is located
on the outboard side of the equipped power seat.
Push the switch f
orward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward
or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat may be equipped with either
a two way or a four way lumbar adjustment. Push the
switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support, and if equipped, push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting
the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
y
ou have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
● When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (6.8 cm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
or eq
ual to 2.7 inches (6 cm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.
● When the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches
(0.7 cm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat
position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (2.3 – 6.8 cm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when the ignition is cycled out
of the OFF position.
● The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (2.3
cm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is
no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled within Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and
Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting
profile (if equipped)
page 44.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
within the Uconnect system
page 181.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
POWER ADJUSTMENT REAR SEATS — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● A
djusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
● Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
● Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against y
our
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
● Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident as
a result.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
im
pede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's
path.
Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped
The power recline feature, located on the trim panel
next to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/
rearward for occupant comfor
t.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward
button, the seat will move in the direction of the button
push. Release the button when the desired position is
reached.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
NOTE:
The third row power recline buttons can be locked
out using the Third Row Lockout setting within the
Uconnect system
page 18
1.
Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If
Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
NOTE:
The thir
d row outboard seat belts may interfere with the
power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing
behind the stow clip before st
owing or opening the seat.
When the seat is in the desired position, remove the
webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use.
Never leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is
used to restrain an occupant.
NOTE:
● The outer head restraints will lower automatically as
necessary when the power seat begins to move.
● The center head restraint raises and lowers
manually but will not lower automatically.
● The head restraint can also be lowered manually
using the pull strap located at the back of the seat
page 62.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
58 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open To Normal
2 — Stow
3 — Fold Forward/Rearward
4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats
To move the selected seat(s) to the normal (seated)
position, push and release the “Normal” button. The
seat will automatically stop when the Normal position is
reached.
To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position,
push and release the “Stow” button. The seat will
automatically stop when the St
ow position is reached.
To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or
reverse direction, push and hold the “Fold Forward/
Back” button. Release the button when the desired
position is reached.
1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the mini-
buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power
third row seats.
2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow” button,
place the outboard seat belt webbing behind the
stow clips, located on the rear trim panel. When
the seat reaches the desired position, remove the
webbing from the clip so it is ready for use to
restrain an occupant.
Seat Belt Stowage Clip
3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion,
push a different seat position selector switch to
stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then
the desired position can be selected.
4. The third ro
w power seat system includes obstacle
detection. When the system detects an obstacle,
the motors will stop and reverse direction. Should
this occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the
button again.
NOTE:
● You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles, or wrinkling of the seat
fabric if the seats are left folded for an extended
period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion may return to its normal shape.
Having an occupant sit in the seat, or massaging
the fabric by hand may smooth away any excess
wrinkling.
● P
ermanent wrinkles may still result.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control butt
ons are
located in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat
settings. The indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
● Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI
setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
● Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
NOTE:
● Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
● The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 33.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
WARNING!
● P
ersons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat heater
. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially
if used for long periods of time.
● Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater
to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been
overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the second row seats are equipped
with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that
allow the second row passengers to operate the seats
independently. The heated seat switches are locat
ed on
the sliding side door handle trim panels.
Second Row Heated Seat Switch (Left Side Shown)
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat
in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
L
O and none for off.
Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push
the switch a second time to select LO-level heating.
Push the switch a third time to shut the heating
elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
HI-level. The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
VENTILA
TED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the first row seat cushions
are small fans that draw the air from
the passenger compartment and move air
through f
ine perforations in the seat cover
to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds: HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located in
the touchscreen.
● Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
● Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
● Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn
the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system,
see
page 33.
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINER HOOKS
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of the second
row rear seats, and if equipped, the backs of the front
row seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the
bagged goods.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the top of
y
our ear.
WARNING!
● All occupants, including the driv
er, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
● Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the v
ehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push do
wnward. The front head
restraints are also adjustable forward and rearward. To
tilt forward, pull the top of the head restraint toward the
front of the vehicle to the desired position. To adjust
the head restraint rearward, continue pulling forward
on the top of the head restraint to the farthest forward
position and the head restraint will return to the upright
position.
NO
TE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted
to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes
and push do
wnward. Then, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
WARNING!
● A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death
to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow
remo
ved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
WARNING!
● ALL the head restraints MUS
T be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the reinstallation instructions prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as well as
the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped), may
have adjustable head restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head restraints
are non-adjustable and non-remov
able. Do not pull on
non-adjustable head restraints when folding the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted
to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes
and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to
the appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually folded
forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release
strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
● The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be raised
and low
ered for tether routing or height adjustment
page 225.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far
as it can go. Then, push the release button and
the adjustment button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the
head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, using the adjustment
button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate
height.
Adjustment Button
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
v
ehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
POWER FOLDING THIRD ROW HEAD
RESTRAINTS — IF EQUIPPED
For improved visibility, the third row outboard head
restraints can be folded using the Uconnect system.
Press Vehicle, then Controls on the Uconnect displa
y.
Press the Head Restraint Fold button to
power fold the third row head restraints.
NOTE:
● The head restraints can be folded downward using
the Head Restraint button or using the manual
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
release strap. The head restraints must be raised
manually when occupying the third row.
● Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF
EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say:
● “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
● “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
● “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have voice recognition buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® by initiating a Siri or Google Assistant voice
recognition session. Depending on your device, you may
need to press and hold the VR button for one second to
begin a v
oice recognition session.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
● Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
● Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead.
● Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your
Voice Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
Up” word and state your command.
NOTE:
The factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey
Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the
Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
● A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on the
radio status bar to also issue a command.
● You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice
Command or saying the vehicle’s “Wake Up” word
and saying a command from the current category.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with Voice Recognition,
you may still have voice recognition buttons. These
buttons will work with Android Auto™ and Apple
CarPlay® by initiating a Siri or Google Assistant voice
recognition session. Depending on your device, you may
need t
o press and hold the VR button for one second to
begin a voice recognition session.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The V
oice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media,
Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call,
And Send Or Receive A TextFor Vehicles No
t Equipped
With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To Answer
An Incoming Phone Call.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2024 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
page 343.
For Uconnect syst
em support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to
adjust up, down and left, right. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward
the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the
view through the rear windo
w.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s view.
You can turn the feature on or of
f through the Uconnect
system
page 181.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spra
y any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — IF
EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors and lift the co
ver.
Illuminated Mirror
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of
the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirr
or will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you t
o collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the
size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN SIGNAL AND
APPROACH LIGHTING — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirr
ors with turn signal
and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are
located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash
with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front
and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning
flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth LED supplies illuminated entry lighting,
which turns on in both mirrors when you use the
key fob or open any door. This LED shines outward
to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also
shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the
doors.
The illuminated entry lighting fades to off after about
30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The approach lighting will not function when the gear
selector is moved out of the PARK position.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and
will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the
inside mirror adjusts.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a conversation
mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push
the panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the
mirror and push to latch it back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Mirror Control Switch
3 — Right Mirror Select
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating
the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Left and Right side power mirror positions can be saved
as part of the driver memory profile (if equipped)
page 44.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS — IF
EQUIPPED
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
Power Folding Mirror Switch
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal to or greater than 1
0 mph (16 km/h),
they will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
● The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding
● The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding
mirror switch)
● The mirrors come out of the unfolded position
● The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them
b
y pushing the button (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING M
IRRORS — IF
EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings
page 181,
the exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after
the doors are locked and closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position:
● Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button
again.
● Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on
the door panel, followed by closing the door.
● After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push
the lock button on the key fob.
● After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch
the lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually (pushing the mirror
head inward by hand), OR by using the power folding
mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will not
aut
omatically unfold.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
two detent positions:
● Full forward position
● Full rearward position
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated whenever
you turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped)
page 75.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside
mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside
mirror will move slightly downward from the present
position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
driver's outside mirror will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled
or disabled through the Uconnect system
page
181.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Scan this QR code to learn more
about HomeLink
®
● HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
by your vehicle’s 12 V
olt battery.
● The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sun visor designate the three
different HomeLink® channels.
● To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with
each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
● The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
system is active
page 343.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN P
ROGRAMMING
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device that is being programmed
to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held
transmitter is programmed to activate the device you
are trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® CHANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A ROLLING
CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE DEVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the
device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device
with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately visible when
looking at the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate
your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3
inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want
to program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code
final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire
is attached to the garage door opener motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door
opener motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor does
not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
● Y
our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.
● Do not run your v
ehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can
cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follo
ws the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
page 67.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code
or non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be performed
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK®
BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the
new device you want to program the HomeLink® button
to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step
2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR PROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S.
gate operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
the garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink®
has successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly
when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It
may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases.
The garage door may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
● If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage door/
device should activate when the HomeLink®
button is pushed.
● To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® univ
ersal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
● Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-
held transmitter.
● Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener
to complete the training for a rolling code.
● Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or visit HomeLink.com for
information or assistance.
WARNING!
● Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
WARNING!
● Y
our motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transmitter with a
garage door opener that has a “stop and re
verse”
feature as required by Federal safety standards.
This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column. The multifunction lever controls
the turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-
to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
interior lights, and the fog lights.
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However
, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the first detent for parking light and
instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel operation.
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise from the parking light and instrument
panel light position to the first detent to turn on the
headlights also. Rotate to the second detent, AUTO
position, to turn on automatic headlights, parking lights,
and instrument panel lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a
constant lights on condition until the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
● For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front
fog lights are turned on.
● If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect system
page 181.
● On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side),
or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard
warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling
the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam system provides increased
forward lighting at night b
y automatically controlling the
high beams through the use of a camera mounted on
the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific
light and automatically switches from high beams to
low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Auto Dim High Beams” through the
Uconnect system to enable the feature
page
181.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO
position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to the high beam position.
Refer to “Multifunction Lever” in this section for
further information.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or
above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
Automatic High Beam system.
1. Deselect “Auto Dim High Beams” through the
Uconnect system
page 181.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch
the headlights from the high beam t
o the low
beam position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from
the AUTO to the on position.
NOTE:
Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will stop
functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and
remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the AUTO
on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the
Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means
your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the Automatic mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS — IF
EQUIPPED
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
NO
TE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
page 181.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your
vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. The 90
second delay interval begins when headlight switch is
turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned
back on or the ignition is placed in the ON position, the
delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds
or not remain on. You can change the timer setting
through the Uconnect system
page 181.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle
will chime when the driver's door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights
or the low beam headlights and push the headlight
switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch
control knob a second time will turn the front fog lights
off.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
TURN SIGNALS
Mo
ve the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does no
t flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals
on, a chime will sound and a message will display in the
cluster to alert the driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
72 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s batt
ery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF position,
and any door is left open or the dimmer control is
rotated all the way up to the dome light on position,
the interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is placed
in the ON position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed
in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically
turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned
on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
● Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the
batter
y from discharging once the doors are closed.
● If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If
Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/
reading lights. The lights turn on when a front door,
a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle
is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob
is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push
the lens t
o turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light off.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch,
and are located on the driver’s side of the instrument
panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upwar
d will increase the
brightness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the
left dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels
of the ambient lighting on the instrument panel and
doors.
Dimmer Controls
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer,
all the interior lights will illuminate. At the bottom
most setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are turned
off (dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument
lighting go to their lo
west dimmable setting.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on
the right side of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of
the lever.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To
turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within
the lever all the way down to OFF.
Windshield Wiper Operation
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
5 — Push Up For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades fr
om returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur
.
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end
of the wiper lever to the f
irst detent position, and then
turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the
desired delay interval. There are four delay settings,
which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cy
cle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent
setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several
wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever
is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the
wipers will operate several cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The washer function must be used in order
to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
page 293.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end
of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent
positions to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is
the most sensitive.
NOTE:
● The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high position.
● The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
● Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce rain sensor performance.
● The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on or off
through the Uconnect system
page 181.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
● Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is
stationary and the outside temperature is below
32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the
windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed
becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the
outside t
emperature rises above freezing.
● Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
will not operate when the ignition is ON, when
the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL
position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the windshield
wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
out of the NEUTRAL position.
● Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers
are not operational when the vehicle is in the
Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the
vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can
resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit
conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for intermittent
operation and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the
lever is pushed while on the intermittent
setting, the wiper will turn on and operate
for several wipe cycles after the lever is released,
and then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the
off position, the wiper will operate several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the
radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch
Display Automatic Temperature Controls
Max A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX
A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting. The
indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
● If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can
be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
● If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not
automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice
on the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
● If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed
if needed.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation button
on the touchscreen, or press the button
on the faceplate, to change the system
between recirculation mode and outside
air. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator
illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically
adjust to optimize customer experience for warming,
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
the AUTO button on the touchscreen, or
push the button on the faceplate. AUTO
will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C)
may be active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended for
efficiency. You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
● Press and release this button on the touchscreen
● Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button
on the touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this
function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost
mode is turned off the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Control
button on the touchscreen or push and
release the button on the faceplate to
turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15
minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild w
ashing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar to
wards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
The temperature can also be adjusted by pressing the
Temperature readout on the top left and right corners
of the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the
front and rear passenger temperature settings with
the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or
rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds a
vailable.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
● Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
● Touchscreen: Blower speed can be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Press the desired blower speed from 1-7.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen or push and release the button
on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
syst
em allows for adjustment of the rear climate
controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
● Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen
to display the rear climate controls. Control functions
now operate the rear system.
● To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the Front Climate or Done button on
the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-in
Display Rear Control Screen
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release the Rear button to access
the rear climate controls. The indicator will
illuminate when the rear climate controls
are on.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release the AUTO button on the
touchscreen, within the Rear screen, to
change the current setting. The REAR AUTO
indicator will illuminate when REAR AUTO is
on. This feature automatically contr
ols the rear interior
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Toggling this function will cause the rear
system to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release the Front button to
change the display on the Uconnect system
back to the Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the front occupants with the
ability to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature will move up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/
off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature
settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower
settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from
both the headliner outlets and the floor
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release the OFF button to turn
the Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system
has floor air outlets underneath the passengers’ seats,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The system provides heated air through the
floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
headliner outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the
rear modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is select
ed by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your
comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
AUTO BUTTON
The A
UT
O butt
on automatically contr
ols
the int
erior cabin t
em
perature b
y adjusting
distribution and amount of air
flo
w
.
P
er
f
orming this function will cause the
syst
em to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature control
up button to raise the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature control
down button to lower the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set
to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing
the blower control buttons. This allows the
rear seat occupants to control the volume of
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the
two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution mode
for the rear passengers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflo
w.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS
AND FUNCTIONS
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminat
es when MAX A/C is on. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C
indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to change
the current setting. The indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
NOTE:
● For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off,
but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent
fogging of the windows.
● If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
● If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation
of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. R
ecirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C
(Air Conditioning) can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use
of this mode is not recommended. On systems with
Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode (if
equipped) is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve
window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED on the
control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button
to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates
when this feature is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. Performing this
function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost
mode is turned off the climate system will return the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
● Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
● Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window.
● Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen
to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when this feature
is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize
the front and rear passenger temperature settings
with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front
or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature. Pressing SYNC on
the touchscreen while in the Front Climate screen
synchronizes the driver and passenger temperatures
only. In order to SYNC rear temperature to driver
temperature, the touchscreen must be on the Rear
Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
● Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn
the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you
turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
● Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce
the blower setting and the large blower icon to
increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also
be selected by pressing the blower bar area between
the icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets
and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to
change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side
to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off
wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
2
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air
is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions t
o
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/
Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system allows for adjustment of the rear climat
e
controls from the front MTC display/touchscreen.
To change the rear system settings:
● Press the Rear Climate button on the touchscreen
to display the rear climate controls. The control
functions now operate the rear system.
● Press the Front Climate button on the touchscreen to
return to the front climate controls.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access
the rear climate controls. The indicator will
illuminate when the rear climate controls
are on.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls from
adjusting the rear temperature and blower
settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release this button to change the
display on the Uconnect system back to the
Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the rear passengers with
independent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature moves up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC To Driver button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/
off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature
settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the
touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side
will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level
Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the
headliner and floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer
air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release this button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Contr
ol (MTC) system
has floor air outlets at the rear right side of the
third row seats and overhead outlets at each outboard
rear seating position. The system provides heated air
through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air
through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located on the headliner on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control system through an intake grille, located in
the floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block
or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature control
up button to raise the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are display
ed in
control head.
To change the temperature in the rear
of the vehicle, push temperature control
down button to lower the temperature. The
rear temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually set
to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing
the blower control buttons. This allows the
rear seat occupants to control the volume of
air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the
two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller
of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
2
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution mode
for the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner.
Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flo
w of air. Moving the
air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut
off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is
designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower controls to
off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower
Off button.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1.
Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You
will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
● It is not necessary to move the temperature settings
for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically
adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
● The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-
programmable feature within the Uconnect system
page 181.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
Automatic Tem
perature Control (ATC) display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead (If
vehicle is equipped with climate control).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
● “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
● “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section
for suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount, type,
and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the
Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see
page 328.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves.
Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow,
and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug
the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service
your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when
needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather
And Vehicle
Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to (Panel
Mode), (A/C) on, and blower on
high. Roll down the windows for a
minute to flush out the hot air. Ad-
just the controls as needed to ach-
ieve comfort.
Warm
Weather
Turn
(A/C) on and set the mode
contr
ol t
o (Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to (Floor
Mode) and turn
(A/C) on to keep
windo
ws clear
.
Cold W
eather
Se
t the mode contr
ol t
o
(Floor
Mode). If windshield fogging starts to
occur, move the control to (Mix
Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Release Handle
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder
, they can spill when the door is closed, burning
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
2
WARNING!
the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to
avoid injury.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the indentation to open
the com
partment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Storage Drawers — If Equipped
There may be a storage drawer locat
ed in the lower
center of the instrument panel, or as part of the
center console. It can be released by pushing the
access button above the drawer. The drawer is actuator
assisted once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer
outward to the fully open position.
Instrument Panel Storage Drawer
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If
lef
t open during a collision, additional damage may
occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some
models.
Front Seatback Storage
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped) located
in the areas below the load floor, located in front of the
second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. To access the storage bins with front seats in
the rearward position, place the lock rod in the
unlocked position so the load floor can fold
upwards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
● Push the lock rod inward for the locked position.
● Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked
position.
2. Pull the latch located near the second r
ow seat to
open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
st
orage bin covers are not properly latched.
● Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
● Keep the st
orage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
● Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
a
v
oid damage fr
om contact with the fr
ont seat tracks,
which ha
v
e minimal clearance to the co
v
er
. If the
st
orage bin co
v
er is lef
t in the open position, fr
ont
seat adjustment may damage the cover.
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
● Alw
ays close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
● Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children ma
y not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
● In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
● Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed
and latched while the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
● Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lie flat and be latched to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the
storage bin cover is left in the open position, fr
ont
seat adjustment may damage the cover.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
2
SEAT STORAGE BIN COVER EMERGENCY
RELEASE LEVER
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover
has an Emergency Release Lever built into the latching
mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened
from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-
dark lever attached t
o the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
LIGHTED CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
On some vehicles, the front cupholders are equipped
with a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for
the front passengers. The light ring is controlled by the
Dimmer Controls
page 73.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are a
vailable for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim
panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped with
hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near
the top of the window
.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
USB/AUX CONTROL
There are numerous USB por
ts located throughout the
vehicle that allow an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
NOTE:
● If a smar
tphone is plugged into a video USB port, the
device will only have charging capability and allow for
files/media to be stored, if equipped with Uconnect
Theater.
● Once a device is connect
ed to the USB port, it
will begin charging and is ready for use with the
system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports
can be used at the same time but cannot be used
simultaneously while playing media. When both Type
C and Type A charge-only USB ports are in use they
will be charged at a reduced rate.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB
port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB
port, a message will appear and allow you to select
which device to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this
vehicle.
● In the center console
● On the instrument panel
● On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media Hubs (if equipped)
● On the back of the front row seats
● Above the rear cup holder in the third row of seats
Charge Only USB In The Center Console
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument panel
can be switched from ignition only to constant battery
powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for
details.
Rear Seat USB Charging
Port Without Uconnect Theater
Rear Seat USB Media Hub With Uconnect Theater
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
3rd Row USB Charging Port — If Equipped
3rd Row USB Charging Port — If Equipped
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
The following list is of different scenarios when a non-
phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger
USB ports, and when a phone device is plugged int
o the
smaller and larger USB ports:
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2
● “A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.”
● “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
● “Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or ano
ther USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen
that the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key
symbol are powered when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled with a
battery symbol are connected directly to the battery and
powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do no
t insert any other object in the power outlets
as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not cov
ered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Depending on the type of center console your vehicle
is equipped with, there is a front power outlet located
either on the bottom of the instrument panel or inside
the center console.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
(In Floor Tray) - If Equipped
12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Center Console)
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo
area.
Rear Power Outlet
NOTE:
The front power outlet can be changed to battery
powered at all times by switching the power outlet
fuse in the Power Distribution Center panel from fuse
location F95A to F95B.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) Front Power
Outlet 10A
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Only de
vices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
● Man
y accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery
will discharge suf
ficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
● Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
● After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must
be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 W Power Inverter outlet
located on the right side of the vehicle, before the third
r
ow of seats to convert DC current to AC current. The
Power Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring up to 150 W.
Certain video game consoles will exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
Power Inverter
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is plugged
in, and the ignition is in ON/RUN position. It turns off
when the device is unplugged or the ignition is no
longer in ON/RUN position.
The Power Inv
erter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 W is exceeded,
the Power Inverter shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the Power Inverter, it
resets. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power
ratings on electrical devices prior to using the Power
Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
● Do no
t insert any objects into the receptacles.
● Do not touch with wet hands.
● Close the lid when not in use.
● If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad Location
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
®
wireless charging pad located below the center stack,
within the storage compartment. This charging pad is
designed to wirelessly charge your
Qi
®
enabled mobile
phone. Qi
®
is a standard that allows wireless charging
of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
®
wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi
®
wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your
mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer.
Please see your phone’s Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
Place the device inside the prepared area delimited in
the mat as shown in the image. Incorrect positioning
will prevent the phone from charging.
LED Indicator Status:
● No Light: Charging pad is idle or sear
ching for a
device. Device may not be compatible with the Qi
®
standard.
● Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
● Red Light/Flashing: Internal err
or, or foreign object is
detected.
● Green Light: Device has completed battery charging
(if device is equipped to transmit this information).
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
● The presence of the Near-Field Communication
(NFC) function active on a smartphone could signal
malfunction anomalies.
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position in order
for the phone to charge.
● To avoid interference with the key fob search, the
wireless charging pad will stop charging when any
door or liftgate is opened, even if the engine is
running.
● Be sure to place the mobile device correctly (display
facing upward, and phone not covering the LED) on
the wireless charging pad.
● If the phone moves on the pad causing the red light
to illuminate, the phone will have to be picked up
and placed back on the charging pad to resume
charging.
● Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone
is connected to a wired charger.
● The phone’s pr
otective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
● iPhones
®
equipped with Magsafe
®
may affect the
charging function, and may cause higher phone
temperature.
● Phones must alw
ays be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad
so that its charging parts connect with the charging
coils of the system. Movement of the phone during
charging may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
● Having multiple applications open on the phone
while charging will reduce the charging efficiency,
and may even shut down an application that is
actively running (i.e. Apple CarPlay
®
). This may also
cause the phone to overheat.
● Wireless chargers may implement certain methods
to prevent the phone from overheating during
charging such as slowing down the rate of charge.
In certain instances, the device may shut down for
a brief period of time (when the device reaches a
certain temperature). If this happens, it does not
mean there is a fault with the wireless charging pad.
This may just be a protective measure to prevent
damage to the phone.
● The use of multiple wireless functions at the same
time (wireless charging, Apple CarPlay
®
, Android
Auto
™
) could cause the device to overheat, resulting
in limitation of the functions or it turning off. In
this case, it is recommended to connect the system
using the USB port.
● Do not place the key fob or any other type of metal/
magnetized object inside the mobile phone housing
or near the wireless charging pad.
92 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
● To protect your phone from overheating, the wireless
charging pad is equipped with an integrated cooling
fan.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging
pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can
cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob.
Placing the f
ob in close proximity of the charging pad
blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power window
controls.
Window Lockout Switch
The window switches will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in
the OFF position, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The
controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position and during power accessory delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the sliding
door window by a single control on the door handle
assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the A
CC or ON/RUN position and during power
accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has activated
the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window
Control (Left Side Shown)
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping
several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDO
W FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down to the second detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
2
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up to the second detent, and
release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure.
If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To rese
t Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window control up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the control up
for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the
window is fully open.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffe
ting with the
windows down, or the sunroof/Power Sliding Top (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or
open any window.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
3 — Vent Button
WARNING!
● Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. Do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by
the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
● In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
(Continued)
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
● Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the open switch and release it within one second.
The sunroof will open automatically from any position
and stop at the full open position. This is called Express
Open.
Push the close switch and release it within one
second and the sunroof will close automatically from
any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop
aut
omatically. This is called Express Close.
NOTE:
● During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
● If the sunshade is in the closed position when
the open switch is pushed, the sunshade will
automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior
to the sunroof opening.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof will
open to the full open position.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the close switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will st
op the movement and the sunroof will
remain in a partially open condition until the sunroof
switch is pushed again.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
SUNSHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half-open and full-open. When opening the sunshade
from the closed position, the sunshade will always
stop at the half-open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be actuated
again to continue to the full-open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade open switch and release it within
one second and the sunshade will open to the half-
open position and stop automatically. Push and release
the sunshade open switch again from the half-open
position and the sunshade will open to the full-open
position and stop automatically. This is called Express
Open.
Push the sunshade close switch and release it within
one second and the sunshade will close automatically
from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed,
the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called Express Close.
NOTE:
● During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the
shade.
● If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button
again will automatically close both the sunroof and
shade com
pletely.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade open switch and the
shade will open to the half-open position and stop
automatically. Push and hold the sunshade open switch
again and the shade will open automatically to the full-
open position.
To close the shade, push and hold the sunshade close
switch.
Any release of the switch will stop the movement
and the sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing
of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If
an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected,
the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the
obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent button within one second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
2
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
opening to the Vent position.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system
page 181.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear
out any debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING
WARNING!
For Hybrid models: Always place the ignition in the
OFF position before opening the hood. If the ignition
is in the RUN position and the Propulsion System is
active when the hood is opened, the electric motor
could automatically start, and persons not clear of
(Continued)
WARNING!
the vehicle could be injured by the electric motor’s
moving parts.
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and
safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be
released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever towar
d the
passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is
located behind the center front edge of the hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and
insert it into the seat located on the underside of
the hood.
NOTE:
● Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear select
or must
be in PARK.
● You may have to push down slightly on the hood
before pushing the safety latch.
● While lifting the hood, use both hands.
● Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
● For Hybrid models: If the vehicle was actively
charging the high voltage battery when the hood was
opened, the vehicle will stop charging until the hood
is closed.
● For Hybrid models: Electric drive mode will not be
available while the hood is open. A message will
show in the instrument cluster display to alert the
driver.
96 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other
hand remove the support rod from its seat and
reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30
cm) from the engine compartment and drop it.
Make sure that the hood is completely closed.
NOTE:
For Hybrid models: If the vehicle stopped charging the
high voltage battery when the hood was opened, the
vehicle will resume charging when the hood closes.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure
hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive
vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
● Key fob
● Liftgate Release Handle
● Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling
the electronic liftgate release handle will unlock and
release the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate.
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
NOTE:
When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors
and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system
page 181.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion.
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
● If y
ou are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several
ways:
● Overhead console liftgate button
● Key fob
● Outside handle (open or reset liftgate latch)
● Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (when liftgate is
open)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
2
● Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) — opens liftgate
only
Using the previously listed ways to open or close the
liftgate:
● When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open
● When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close
● When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Left Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Right Sliding Door
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If
the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the
touch pad on the outside handle or Hands-Free Lif
tgate
foot activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the
liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key f
ob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.
NOTE:
● To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot
activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive Entry
key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
● When you pull the electronic liftgate release handle,
either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors
and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
selected setting in the Uconnect system.
● Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed
with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned
on or off in Uconnect Settings
page 181.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior
Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper
left trim in the liftgate opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Button
NOTE:
If the power liftgate will not fully open or latch close,
check the latch for damage or obstacles that may
be preventing the closing operation. If the problem
persists, proceed as follows:
1. Press the electronic liftgate release handle on the
outside of the liftgate to home/reset the latch
mechanism.
2. Manually close the liftgate by pulling downward
using the closing handle.
3. Resume normal power liftgate open or closing
operation.
If the home/reset procedure is unsuccessful, see an
authorized dealer for service.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the liftgate
door handle. You may also move your foo
t sideways or
in a sweeping motion.
98 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package,
the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power Liftgate
will be located on the left and right side of the receiver.
Use a straight kicking motion under either activation
zone to open the Hands-Free Liftgate.
Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate
will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate
will open after approximat
ely one second. This assumes
all options are enabled in the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft
(1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on
or of
f in Uconnect Settings. The Hands-Free Liftgate
feature should be turned off during jacking, tire
changing, and vehicle service .
NOTE:
● The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
● If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it
is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
● There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
● If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated
manually.
● The power liftgate will release, but not power open,
in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
● If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to
reset power liftgate functionality.
● The Hands-Free Liftgate only works to open the
liftgate.
WARNING!
● Driving with the lif
tgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when y
ou are operating the
vehicle.
● If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props
when opening the liftgate in cold w
eather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage ma
y occur
. Ensure the lif
tgat
e tra
v
el path
is clear
. Mak
e sure the lif
tgat
e is closed and latched
bef
ore driving a
w
a
y
.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed position,
there is a large area f
or cargo storage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft (1.2 x
2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle
floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be
mo
ved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated
vacuum system. This vacuum is for in-vehicle use only
and should only be used on dry materials and on in-
vehicle surfaces. It is located in the rear trim panel
behind the sliding door on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read all instructions before using. When using
your vacuum, basic precautions should be followed,
including the following:
WARNING!
● Ne
ver leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not t
o touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in either
the ACC position, or engine running (ON), unless
you are using the vacuum system. Be aware a
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle when the vacuum system
is in use. ALWAYS push ignition button to place
ignition in the OFF position when finished using
the vacuum system.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:
● Do no
t use v
acuum while v
ehicle is in motion or
while driving.
● Do no
t v
acuum w
e
t sur
f
aces or an
y
liq
uids.
● Do no
t use t
o v
acuum up an
ything
outside of the vehicle.
● Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as
gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors
(Continued)
WARNING!
from flammable liquids may form an explosive
mixture with air and can be ignited by heat,
sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel to a source
of ignition and explode.
● Do not vacuum anything that
is burning or smoking, such as
cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/
embers.
● Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close attention is
necessary when used by or near children.
● Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
● Use only as described in this manual. Use only
attachments provided with your vehicle.
● Do not put any object into openings. Do not use
with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint,
hair, and anything that may reduce air flow.
● Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine
bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
● Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as
glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
● Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of
body away from openings and moving parts.
● Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that
the filter is in place and in good condition.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as switches,
motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or
sparks that can cause an explosion. When using
your vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or
service stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m)
away from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing
pump. The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches
(45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle.
The vacuum will operate in two modes:
● Ignition in the ACC position: Engine remains off, and
vacuum usage is limited to 10 minutes.
● Ignition in the START position: Engine is running, and
vacuum usage is unlimited until the vehicle’s battery
level falls below 60%.
NOTE:
The vacuum will not operate when the ignition is in the
OFF position, or in the ON/RUN position with the engine
off. For more information on ignition positions, see
page 29.
1. Before Using Vacuum:
Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to 10
minutes of operation
Always apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and push ignition button
to place ignition in Accessory (ACC) mode. The
engine will not be running in this mode. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children.
NOTE:
The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off
battery power and then the vacuum will shut down.
A low battery indication light (LOW PWR) located
below the vacuum nozzle storage location will
come on one minute before the vacuum shuts
down.
Engine Running (START) Operation - For more than
10 minutes of operation
● Position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and leave engine
running.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases
can cause serious injury or death. Follow
these precautions to prevent carbon monoxide
poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases.
● Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Always position
vehicle outdoors and fully open all side
windows before using vacuum system with
the engine running.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly.
2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend
vacuum hose from the storage location.
NOTE:
The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle
floor.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
2
3. Install desired attachment if needed.
Front Storage Compartments
1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location
2 — Attachment Compartment
NOTE:
To access crevice or upholstery attachments, open
the front Attachment Compartment.
● Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spaces
including the seat latches located in the floor.
● U
pholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris
from carpets and seats. This tool can also be
used to pick up pet hair.
● Hose Extension — Use to add another 12 ft (3.6
m) of usable length to the vacuum hose. Hose
extension is provided in a bag attached to a
grocery hook behind the third row seat on the
driver’s side.
4. Push the vacuum on/off button
located under
the vacuum nozzle storage location. Use vacuum
as needed.
NOTE:
● When the vacuum is ON, the LED indicator on
the on/off button will illuminate.
● When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indicator will
also be off.
● After nine minut
es of operation in ACC mode
(engine not running), the Low P
ower Indicator
Light (LOW PWR) will illuminate.
Power Buttons
1 — Low Power Indicator Light
2 — On/Off Button
WARNING!
For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of
fire, serious injury or death:
● Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion
or while driving.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Do no
t vacuum wet surfaces or
any liquids.
● Do not use to vacuum up
anything outside of the vehicle.
● Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such
as gasoline, or use around explosive v
apors.
Vapors from flammable liquids may form an
explosive mixture with air and can be ignited
by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel
to a source of ignition and explode.
● Do not vacuum anything that
is burning or smoking, such
as cigarettes, matches, or hot
ashes/embers.
● Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close
attention is necessary when used by or near
children.
● Do not leave the vacuum running while
unattended.
● Use only as described in this manual. Use
only attachments provided with your vehicle.
● Do not put any object into openings. Do not
use with any opening blocked; keep free of
dust, lint, hair, and anything that may reduce
air flow.
● Do not vacuum toxic material such as
chlorine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.
● Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as
glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.
(Continued)
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
● K
eep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all
parts of body away from openings and moving
parts.
● Only use with filter in place. Periodically
check that the filter is in place and in good
condition.
WARNING!
This equipment incorporates parts such as
switches, motors, or the like that tend to
produce arcs or sparks that can cause
an explosion. When using your vacuum
near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service
stations, par
k vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away
from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing
pump. The vacuum is mounted more than 18
inches (45 cm) above ground level in your
vehicle.
5. When finished, push power button to turn vacuum
off and store vacuum hose and any attachments.
6. Before exiting the vehicle:
● If the ignition is in the ACC position, push the
START/STOP ignition butt
on to place ignition
in the OFF position, remove key fob from the
vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● If the engine is running, raise all of the
windows, push the START/STOP ignition button
to place ignition in the OFF position, remove key
fob from the vehicle, close all of the doors and
the liftgate and lock the vehicle.
Vacuum Troubleshooting
● DO NO
T use with any opening blocked. If an object
becomes lodged in the hose, attempt to fully extend
the hose in a straight line while the vacuum motor
is running. If this does not dislodge the object, turn
the vacuum OFF and remov
e the hose from the
vehicle using the subsequent removal instructions.
If the filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin
procedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection
bin to remove any collected debris from the filter.
Both the bin and the filter can be rinsed with water
if needed. To avoid mold and stale odors, allow both
to dry completely before reinstalling in your vehicle.
If the filter has tears, holes or other damage and
needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized
dealer.
● If there are any other issues with your vacuum,
contact an authorized dealer. Your vacuum has no
user serviceable parts.
Debris Bin
The debris bin is located behind the access panel
behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Empty
1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF.
2. Open the access panel by pulling the finger grip
towards you and then pull downward.
Vacuum System Access Panel
3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise and pull
the bin towards you.
Debris Bin Release Knob
4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a trash
can. Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to
remove loose debris from the filt
er. If the filter
is clogged from extended use, have the filter
replaced by an authorized dealer.
5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
2
NOTE:
The debris bin must be fully installed and locked for the
vacuum to function properly.
Hose Access Port
The hose access port is located behind the access
panel behind the third row seat on the driver’s side.
To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning
1. Open the access panel.
Vacuum System Access Panel
2. Open the small access panel on the upper right
side, and unclip the hose from the hose access
port by pushing the yellow vacuum hose release
lever with right thumb and lifting the hose with
index finger.
Vacuum Hose Release Lever
3. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location located
behind the sliding door.
4. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the hose
out through vacuum nozzle storage location.
5. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck in the
hose. Take care not to perforate the hose while
attempting to dislodge any objects.
6. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip the
hose into place.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF
EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Roof Rack
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The Stow ‘n Place roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the
external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle
load capacity.
104 GETTING TO KNOW Y
OUR VEHICLE
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift
the cr
ossbar from its stowed position in the side
rail. Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
cr
ossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking
care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the
thumb screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making
sure the letters on the crossbars align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb
screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are no
t identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed
in two different positions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the
thumb screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar a
way
from the matching letter to remove it from the
deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot
supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct side
rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar align
with the matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten
the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar
on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
● To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
● If any metallic object is placed over the satellite
radio ant
enna (if equipped), you may experience
interruption of satellite radio reception.
106 GETTING T
O KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Anything improperly secured to the roof rack,
crossbars, or the roof itself can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in collisions,
personal injury, or property damage. Follow the roof
rack cautions when carrying anything on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
● T
o prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly
on the roof. If it is necessar
y to place the load on
the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
● To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity
of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads
as evenly as possible and appropriately secure the
load and any protective layer placed between the
load and the roof surface.
● Load should always be secured to cross bars
first, with tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended
as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use
ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Long loads that e
xtend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
● Trav
el at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on
the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes
or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift
to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the digital cluster.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
● Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2.
Instrument Cluster Display
● When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster display
messages
page 112.
● The display shows one of the main menu items
after the ignition is turned/placed on.
3. Speedometer
● Indicat
es vehicle speed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
3
4. Temperature Gauge
● The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system
is operating satisfactorily.
● The gauge can indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats .
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reaches “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
(Continued)
CAUTION!
conditioner turned off until the gauge drops
back into the normal range and is no longer
red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
● The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel
door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when
the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — HYBRID MODELS
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. % Power Gauge
● Indicates vehicle power. The upper half of the
gauge is a summation of the engine and high
voltage battery pow
er applied to move the
vehicle. Bottom half indicates when the high
voltage battery is charging via regenerative
braking, while slowing the vehicle down.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
● The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display. When the appropriate
conditions exist, this display shows messages
page 112.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
3
● Max Regeneration symbol appears
in the upper right corner of the
Instrument Cluster Display when
you are driving at the maximum
efficiency
page 126.
3. Fuel Gauge
● The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position.
● The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the v
ehicle where the fuel
door is located.
4. Left Reconfigurable Screen With Four Customer
Programmable Options
● Efficiency Coach: This gauge provides visual
awareness on how to achieve maximum energy
efficiency while driving. When accelerating and
braking, the most efficient operation will be
represented with the gauge color being green.
Less efficient operation will be represented
by yellow, followed by orange, as the level of
efficiency decreases.
● Charge/Power: This gauge represents the
source of the power utilized to accelerate the
vehicle. The teal outer ring represents the High
Voltage (HV) battery output during acceleration,
and input power during regeneration. The blue
inner ring represents the engine output power.
● Energy Economy: this gauge represents the
combined MPG (or km/L, or L/100km) obtained
through engine use and MPG (or km/L, or L/
100km) equivalent obtained through HV battery
use. The outer ring represents current energy
economy. The white inner ring represents
average energy economy.
● NONE
5. Right Reconfigurable Screen With Four Customer
Programmable Options
● EV Range & Battery %: shows values for electric
range and battery %, along with a teal gauge
showing battery % (state of charge <1 to 100%).
● Electric Range: shows the vehicle’s electric
range capability, based on the High Voltage
Battery State of Charge (state of charge <1 to
100%).
● All Range Values: shows values for electric,
hybrid and total range, along with a white gauge
showing the total range.
● NONE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver.
With the ignition in the OFF position (and the key
removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/
closing of a door will activate the display for viewing,
and display the total miles or kilometers in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed
to display important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument
cluster display can show you how systems are working
and give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and
ent
er the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make selections
and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION
AND CONTROLS
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the center
of the instrument cluster.
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
● Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
● Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
● Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
● OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item.
Push and hold the OK arrow button for one second
to reset displayed/selected features that can be
reset.
STOP SAFELY VEHICLE WILL S
HUT OFF SOON
Stop Safely Vehicle Will
Shut Off Soon Warning Message
This warning will appear on the instrument panel
display when the vehicle has determined an operational
issue will occur shortly, which will cause the vehicle's
propulsion system to turn off. This message will display
along with dashes for the gas engine range and EV
range will continue t
o show range value. If this message
appears while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe location
as soon as possible. Have the vehicle transported to an
authorized dealer.
Another urgent message may appear if the gas engine
is unavailable and EV range is limited, to indicate the
vehicle will shut off in less than two minutes.
Stop Safely Vehicle Will Shut Off
In Less Than Two Minutes Message
● These are high priority messages
● These messages will display continuously
● Cannot be cleared with button press
● A single chime will sound
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
3
● Back/Left Arrow Button
STOP SAFELY AND LEAVE THE VEHICLE AS
SOON AS POSSIBLE
Stop Safely And Leave The Vehicle
As Soon As Possible Warning Message
A warning will appear on the instrument panel display
if the system detects the high voltage battery has
overheated. This can result in a vehicle fire, and the
release of toxic and/or flammable gases. To reduce
the risk of a larger fire, the vehicle’s high voltage
propulsion system will turn off within thirty seconds of
displaying this warning. At that time, the vehicle may
not accelerate. You can still steer and brake the vehicle.
● This message will be displayed continuously
● Cannot be cleared with button press
● A continuous and rapid chime will sound.
Stop and park the vehicle in an open area. Have all
passengers exit the vehicle as soon as possible and
move to a safe distance away from the vehicle. After
all passengers safely exit the vehicle, call emergency
responders immediately. Even if you do not see flames,
a fire may start at any moment, so do not attempt to
re-ent
er or start the vehicle.
ENGINE OIL LIFE
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the cluster features.
● Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display for approximately five seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate it
is time to change the engine oil. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
● Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
● To reset the oil change indicator after performing
the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following
procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Resetting oil
life other than when associated with a scheduled
maintenance may result in damage due to not properly
maintaining the engine oil.
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE S
TART/STOP button and place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster
display menu screen.
3. Push and release the down arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the left arrow button or right arrow
button to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%.
6. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument
clust
er display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition
in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If
necessary, repeat this procedure.
I
NSTRUMENT C
L
US
TER
D
ISPLA
Y
M
ENU
I
TEMS
The instrument clust
er displa
y can be used t
o vie
w the
main menu items for several features. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu
is reached
page 112.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in
the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Speedometer is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to
toggle between MPH and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
thr
ough the f
ollo
wing information submenus:
Tire Pressure Monit
or
If tire pressure is correct f
or all tires, a vehicle icon is
displa
y
ed with tire pressure v
alues in each corner of the
ICON.
If one or more tires ha
v
e lo
w pressure, “Inflat
e Tire
T
o XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset
page 223.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displa
ys the actual transmission t
em
perature.
Oil T
em
p — If Eq
uipped
Displays the actual oil t
em
perature.
Oil Pressure
Displa
ys the actual oil pressure.
Oil Lif
e
Displa
ys the remaining engine oil lif
e as a per
centage.
T
o reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The
“Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all
times, but the following conditions will need to be met
in order to reset Oil Life:
● The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to
100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message
will display for five seconds, describing the required
conditions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Driver Assist is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control and LaneSense:
● Driver Assist Screen shows the current status of both
the ACC and the LaneSense systems
● Pop-up messages also indicat
e the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be met
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) F
eature
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status
page 147. Push the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the
instrument cluster display:
● Adaptive Cruise Control Off: when ACC is
deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Off.”
● Adaptive Cruise Control Ready: when ACC is
activated but the vehicle speed setting has not
been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.” Push the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel).
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
● Distance Setting Change
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
3
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster displays the current LaneSense
system settings. The information displayed depends on
LaneSense system status and the conditions that need
to be met
page 1
63.
Hybrid Info
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until Hybrid Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the following information submenus:
Energy Economy
● Average MPG gauge + value (hold OK to reset)
● Current Energy Economy gauge + value
● Total Range
Range to Empty
● Electric Range
● Hybrid Range
● Total Range
Efficiency Coach Gauge
Efficiency Coach will monitor your current driving to
help you drive as efficient as possible.
● “Accel” is based on amount of acceleration
(Different from MPG).
○ The gauge will only move up when accelerator
pedal is pushed (or accelerating with Cruise
Control or ACC).
○ Above a certain rate of change will be considered
inefficient.
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
● “Brake” is based on amount of deceleration
(slowing down).
○ The gauge will only move down when brake pedal
is pushed (or decelerating with Cruise Control or
ACC).
○ The color of the gauge bar will change from green
to yellow to orange.
● The gauge bar color will transition smoo
thly up
and down, and have a gradual change based on
efficiency.
○ Center of gauge is 0% Accel and 0% Brake.
○ +/-0-35% of gauge fills green, +/-36-80% yellow,
and +/-81-100% orange (with a blend between
each color).
● When Rotary Shifter is shifted to L:
○ Max Regen Telltale is displayed in
the upper right hand corner of the
instrument cluster
○ Max Regeneration ON’ Message is displayed for
5 seconds
Max Regen Cluster Message
NOTE:
While attempting to shift into L, if “vehicle speed is
too high to shift to L” message is displayed, the Max
Regen ON/OFF message/TT should not be Displayed
page 111
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Efficiency Coach
● When Rotary Shifter is shifted back to P/R/N/D:
○ Max Regen Telltale goes away
○ Max Regeneration OFF Message is displayed for 5
seconds
NOTE:
While attempting to shift out of L, if “vehicle speed
is t
oo High to shift to P (or R)” message is displayed,
the Max Regen OFF/ON message should not be
displayed. The Telltale should continue to display as
long as the vehicle is in L gear.
Charge/Power
Charge/Power Gauge
● Charging is represented by the gauge filling on the
left hand side.
● Power is represented by the gauge filling on the right
hand side.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will
display the following:
● Toggle between available submenu pages using the
left and right arrow buttons; average, average
and current, and current values displayed:
○ Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
○ Range To Empty (miles or km)
○ Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
○ The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine req
uirements
● Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Trip Info
Trip Info Gasoline
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button
t
o scr
oll thr
ough the T
rip A and T
rip B submenus. The
T
rip inf
ormation will displa
y the f
ollo
wing:
● Distance
● A
v
erage F
uel Econom
y
● Elapsed Time
Hold the OK butt
on t
o rese
t feature information.
Trip Info Hybrid
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until Trip Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip
information will display the following:
Trip A
● Distance Electric
● Distance Hybrid
● Distance Total
● Average Energy Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Trip B
● Distance Electric
● Distance Hybrid
● Distance Total
● Average Energy Economy
● Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
3
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster
display.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button
will allo
w y
ou t
o see what the st
ored messages are.
NO
TE:
The pop-up messages indicat
e the status of the syst
em
and/or the conditions that need to be me
t. Messages
remain in the st
ored stack until condition is cleared.
Screen Se
tup
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter
the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displa
yed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Push and release the up
or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter
the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displa
yed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Time Range
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Center
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Range Time
Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title Digital Speed
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Lower Left or Lower Right
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Upper Center
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Time Range to Empty Average (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Current (MPG,
L/100km, or
km/L)
Audio/Phone Digital Speed Menu Title
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
● Show
● Hide
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
HYBRID INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY SCREEN SETUP OPTIONS
Left Side
None Energy Economy Efficiency
Coach
Charge/ Power
Right Side
None Battery % &
Range
Electric Range
Charge/ Power All (3) Range
Values
Upper Left and Upper Right
None Compass (If
Equipped)
Outside Temp
Upper Left and Upper Right
Time Average MPG
(or “L/100km”,
or “km/L”)
Current MPG (or
“L/100km”, or
“km/L”)
Trip A (Total Dis-
tance)
Trip B (Total Dis-
tance)
Battery %
Total Range Electric Range Hybrid Range
Odometer
● Show
● Hide (unless door open)
Defaults
● Restore
● Cancel
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER MODE
MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD REDUCTION
ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the
electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take
place to extend the driving time and distance of the
vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off
non-essential 12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction
will be functional when the v
ehicle propulsion system is
active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on the
High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or
temperature. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may
stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart
after the current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge
at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
● The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
● If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
page 120.
The following are electrical loads that may be switched
off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
● Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
● Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
● Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
● HVAC System
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
3
Odometer
● Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of
the following conditions:
● The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
● Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights,
overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
● Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and
similar devices.
● Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
● The vehicle was parked for an extended period of
time (weeks, months).
● The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
● The battery was discharged by an electrical load left
on when the vehicle was parked.
● The battery was used for an extended period with
the engine not running to supply radio, lights,
chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum
cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery
Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
● R
educe power to unnecessary loads if possible:
○ Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
○ Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
○ Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
○ Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
● Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
● Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
● The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message
and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in
appear different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault with the air bag, and will turn on
for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will
display first if applicable. The system check menu may
● 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related
to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake
system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which
will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master
cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed.It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn
off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault
is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed. This
indicator will reflect which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
system
page 145.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the ETC system. If a problem
is detected while the vehicle is running, the
light will either stay on or flash depending
on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
the v
ehicle is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough
idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
3
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
towing. The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service
page 279.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Service
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
service to the hybrid electric system is
needed. It will be accompanied by a
“Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System”
warning message in the cluster. If the t
elltale stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Limp Home Mode Warning Light
This warning light illuminates along with a
warning message when vehicle acceleration
is limited due to a reduction in engine
or electric motor performance. Service the
vehicle immediately if illumination persists.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the
engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the
hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
Plug Status Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when a
plug status fault is detected (when vehicle
not in motion). It will be accompanied by a
cluster message indicating the type of fault.
You may receive one of the following messages if a fault
is detected:
● “Service Charging System” – If you see this
message, it is recommended to unplug and plug in
again, or try a different charging station. If an issue
continues, contact an authorized dealer to service
your high voltage charging system.
● “Issue Detected Check External Charging Station” –
If you see this message, the charging station maybe
powered off, having internal fault or being scheduled
to charge later. It is recommended to try a different
charging station. If an issue continues, then contact
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
● Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may
not support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
does not charge, it may be connected to a non-
compliant Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators.
Please identify this failure to the site operator and/or
EVSE provider.
● Before this vehicle can be driven, the EVSE Charging
Cord must be disconnected from the vehicle.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s
seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and
a chime will sound
page 225.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of
a high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster,
with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will
flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLO
W WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is
not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service
page
147.
Electric Park Brak
e Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated.
It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48
km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
● The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator
Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
3
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
● This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned t
o ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II
that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have
the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss
of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The
vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park
over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light illuminates when there is a fuel
level sensor failure. If this light illuminates,
take it to an authorized dealer and have
them inspect it.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the v
ehicle is approaching a
lane marker. The warning light will flash
when the vehicle is crossing the lane
marker
page 163.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on,
and remain on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate and
a single chime will sound when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate that
the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not
functioning properly and that service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a fault in the FCW or PEB Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
page 220.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service
page
146.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires
as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
(Continued)
CAUTION!
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants
may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
3
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forw
ard Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Vehicle Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and
the vehicle in front is detected
page
147.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and
there is no vehicle in front detected
page 147.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
page 147.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
fr
ont fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is armed and
ready to provide visual and torque warnings
if an unintentional lane departure occurs
page
163.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode
page 146.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corresponding
exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn
signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
● A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
● Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Max Regeneration Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that Max Regeneration is on and capable.
When the switch is pressed, the following
instrument cluster messages will be seen:
● “Max Regeneration On” – appears when the feature
is turned on.
● “Max Regeneration Off” – appears when the feature
is turned off.
● “Max Regeneration Unavailable” – appears when the
feature is requested, but the vehicle is unable to
comply. LED will flash for five seconds to indicate
unavailability
page 116.
Ready To Drive Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the vehicle has enough power to be
driven, regardless of the speed of the vehicle.
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Plug Status Indicator Light
When plugged in, the green plug indicator
light will illuminate if the EVSE charging plug
is securely attached to the charging port.
This indicates that the plug is detected, but
doesn't mean it is charging. It will be accompanied with
a cluster message indicating the charge status:
● “Plugged In And Charging”
● “Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set
Schedule”
● “Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned
on but not set
page 147.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set
page
147.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
page 163.
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Cruise
Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
settings.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on.
With the low beams activated, push the
multifunction lever forw
ard (toward the front
of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams
are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. When these
systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as
emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making
repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
● Pr
olonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any
emissions tests can be per
formed.
● If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
ONBO
ARD DIAGNOSTIC SY
S
TEM
(
OBD II)
C
YBERSECURIT
Y
Y
our v
ehicle is req
uired t
o ha
v
e OBD II and a
connection port t
o allo
w access to information related
to the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access this
information to assist with the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle and emissions system
page 181.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
3
WARNING!
● ONL
Y an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port
in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
● If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver
-behavior
tracking device, it may:
○ Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or
a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
○ Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal
requirement to pass an inspection of your
vehicle's emissions control system. Failure
to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that req
uire an Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is
running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD
II system may not be ready if your vehicle was
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or
a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be
determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may
fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check
if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things
will happen:
● The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not
ready and you should not proceed to the I/M
station.
● The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you
can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle
was recently serviced or had a battery failure or
replacement, you may need to do nothing more than
drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for
your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the
previously mentioned test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can
fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE VEHICLE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allo
wing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
(N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting
to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using the ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior
to the engine starting, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to
an ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF, ACC,
and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and to use the accessories, follow
these steps:
● Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
● Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
● Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position
(instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
● Push the ENGINE STAR
T/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster
page 112.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK under certain situations.
It is a back-up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Driv
er inattention could lead to failure to place the
v
ehicle in P
ARK. AL
W
A
Y
S DO A VISU
AL CHECK that
y
our v
ehicle is in P
ARK b
y v
erifying that a solid
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
4
WARNING!
(not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. If the
“P” indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
● AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is no
t in PARK and the driver attempts
to turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met,
the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the
vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The gear
selector will automatically reset itself to the PARK
position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF
position (engine off). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark
Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
v
ehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions
are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting
the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The
Electric P
ark Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate
in some conditions
page 138.
NOTE:
The engine will remain running.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “A
utoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injur
y or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
(Continued)
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
f
ollowing precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complet
e stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Bef
ore shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brak
e manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may Park.
PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P”
will display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position
indicator will blink continuously until the gear selector
is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission
will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the conditions are
met, enabling Aut
oPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
(Continued)
WARNING!
position can roll. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has
not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1
. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition to the START position and
release it when the engine starts. For Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ ignition systems, press and hold
the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/
STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes,
then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Star
ting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an Extended Park condition as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal
all the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel
in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure
WARNING!
● Ne
ver pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
● Do not att
empt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle.
● If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly
page 274.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW –
22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable star
ting at these temperatures, use
of an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
ENGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING THE
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds
or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is
in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
STARTING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
Bef
ore starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
● When e
xiting the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
● Allo
wing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
To achieve Propulsion System Active (PSA) or Ready to
Drive mode, press the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
In extreme temperatures, high or low, the high voltage
battery may need to be conditioned, and therefore may
require the vehicle to be plugged in
page 14.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back-up method
can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
NORMAL STARTING
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Achieving Vehicle READY Using The ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The READY indicator will appear in the cluster
when the vehicle is in Ready to Drive mode, which
may include the start of the engine depending on
conditions such as battery state of charge and
engine temperature.
4. If you wish to terminate Ready to Drive mode, push
the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL
Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch by providing three positions: OFF, ACC
and RUN. To change the ignition mode without starting
the vehicle (to power certain accessories), follow these
steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once,
without brake pedal being pressed, to place the
ignition in the ACC position (instrument cluster will
display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time, without brake pedal being pressed, to place
the ignition in the RUN position (instrument cluster
will display “Ignition or Accessory On”).
NOTE:
● The vehicle is not able to be driven in the
Ignition or Accessory On position, see “Achieving
Vehicle READY Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button” previously defined in this section for
further information.
● The rotary gear selector will turn but only PARK
and NEUTRAL are accessible in the Ignition or
Accessory On position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time,
without brake pedal being pressed, to return the
ignition to the OFF position (instrument cluster will
display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle.
Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if
both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure
is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning
message will display in the instrument cluster.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on
the following pages occur. It is a back-up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
● Driv
er inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid
(not blinking) “P” is indicat
ed in the instrument
cluster display and near the gear selector. If the
"P" indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
● AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not
be relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is
in PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
4
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts
to turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met,
the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the
vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The rotary
shifter will automatically reset itself to the PARK
position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF
position (Engine off). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark
Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions
are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting
the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The
Electric Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate
in some conditions.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
● Brake pedal is no
t pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument clust
er.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are
met:
● Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
● Vehicle is not in PARK
● Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
● Driver’s door is ajar
● Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not
pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injur
y or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
(Continued)
WARNING!
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running or the propulsion system is active. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● Ne
ver leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned no
t to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Shift into PARK or into or out of REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a comple
te stop.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal with the
exception of shifting between DRIVE and LOW.
Shifting between DRIVE and LOW can occur
without any brake application.
Achieving Propulsion System Active (PSA) Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/S
TOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle
may park.
P
ark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P”
will display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle
speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift
can be completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission
will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the previously stated
condition is met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AFTER STARTING
To optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will
automatically control engine operation.
TO TURN OFF THE VEHICLE USING
ENGINE ST
ART/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE ST
ART/STOP button.
2. The ignition button indicator will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with
vehicle speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h), when
the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed, the
instrument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message, and the vehicle will remain
running.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with
vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
when the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
continuously for at least two seconds (or three
short pushes in a row) the vehicle ignition mode
will exit Drive Ready mode and enter Accessory
mode. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
● This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shutdown
feature. If the vehicle is left in a READY state (vehicle
running) with the gear selector in PARK for one hour,
the vehicle will automatically turn itself off.
● The vehicle provides automatic notification, using
a three Horn Chirp Alert, cluster chiming, and a
cluster message “Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle”
if the vehicle was not turned OFF (still “Ready to
Drive”) and a valid key fob for the vehicle is not
detected within the passenger cabin, following the
opening and closing of any passenger compartment
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
4
door (requires all doors to be closed before the key
fob check will occur). These automatic alerts are
to remind the driver to turn off the vehicle before
leaving it, as well as, to let the driver know that
the vehicle's key fob may have been unintentionally
removed from the vehicle by an exiting passenger.
After providing the Horn Chirp Alert, additional auto
chirps will be inhibited until the gear selector has
been moved out of park or ignition cycled.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended. For ambient
temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block
heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow these
steps to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the
passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it
into a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to
the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it away
behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
● The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from an authorized dealer.
● The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
● The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cor
d before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (1
00 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-
in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality grades
page 289.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should
be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple
operation, and some additional features that make the
parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
● Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
● Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
page 182.
The EPB is located in the integrated center stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
T
o apply the par
king brak
e manually, push the switch
momentarily
. Y
ou may hear a sound fr
om the back
of the v
ehicle while the par
king brak
e engages. Once
the par
king brak
e is fully engaged, the Brak
e W
arning
Light in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal
while you apply the parking brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking
brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is
OFF, however, it can only be released when the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
par
king brak
e will aut
omatically engage whene
v
er the
transmission is placed int
o P
ARK. Once the par
king
brak
e is engaged, the Brak
e W
arning Light in the
instrument clust
er and the LED indicator on the switch
will illuminat
e. If y
our foot is on the brake pedal, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement
while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the
transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver
seat belt is buckled and an attempt is made to drive the
vehicle away by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages.
You may also notice a small amount of movement
in the brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully
disengaged, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
mov
ement and possible injury or damage.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
● Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
● Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
● Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to
slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the
brake system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
4
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary
to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, push on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The Brake Warning Light will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought
to a complete stop using the parking brake, when the
vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the
parking brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the Brake Warning Light
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the EPB system
is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the
vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the customer
programmable features
page 182.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking brake
automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the
automatic transmission is no
t in PARK, the seat belt
is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is
at a standstill, and there is no attempt to press the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the parking brake
will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from
rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB while the driver door is open and brake pedal
is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be
enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20
km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and
back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary
for you or your technician to push the rear piston into
the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) system, this can only be done after retracting
the EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can
be done easily by entering Brake Service in your vehicle
page 182. This menu-based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator
in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service has requirements that must be met in
order to be activated:
● The vehicle must be at a standstill.
● The parking brake must be unapplied.
● The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in Brake Service, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service wor
k is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
● Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
● Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
● Apply the EPB.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
hav
e any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injur
y or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
(Continued)
WARNING!
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
f
ollowing precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complet
e stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This
helps the driver avoid inadv
ertently leaving the vehicle
without placing the transmission in PARK. This system
also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the engine
will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK,
and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before
exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes
are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the
engine must be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the
LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to
a lower gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
4
gear range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on
the gear selector and then rotate it, to access the
L position. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple
gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply
rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned
to the proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its
shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few
shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This
is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles.
Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By
design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and
conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear t
o engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle
is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When e
xiting the vehicle, always:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Shift the transmission into PARK.
● Turn the ignition off.
● Remove the ke
y fob from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● Before moving the transmission gear selector out
of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
● DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not mo
ve out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
140 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine
may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 177.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 280.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all f
orward
gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may modify
the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light will illuminate,
a w
arning message will appear in the instrument
cluster, and the transmission may operate differently
until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission
to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the
torque converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or
NINTH gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm
page 141. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when descending
very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will
downshift for increased engine braking. To access the
LOW position, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may
remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for
service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing
the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on your
vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages
automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result
in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch
automatically disengages.
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
4
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when the vehicle is cold. This
is normal. The torque converter clutch will function
normally once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — HYBRID
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting
out of PARK.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injur
y or damage.
● Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission
is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
● The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator
solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure
that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the
(Continued)
WARNING!
PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting
the vehicle.
● It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
● Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
● Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children
to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
● Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
(Continued)
WARNING!
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
● Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
● Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
● Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P)
before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position.
This helps the driver avoid inadv
ertently leaving the
vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This
system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever
the ignition is in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission will NOT shift out of the PARK position
if the engine is not running even when the brakes are
applied. Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and
the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting
the vehicle.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK
(BTSI) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
P
ARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
(engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
HYBRID TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The
transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the
LOW (L) position will increase the rate of deceleration
along with increasing regeneration of power into the
vehicle’s High Voltage (HV) battery (in comparison
to the DRIVE position). The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector
and in the instrument cluster display. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on
the gear selector, and then rotate it, to access the L
position. You must also press the brake pedal to shift
the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the
vehicle is stopped). To shift past multiple gear ranges
at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE
range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the transmission will
shift into NEUTRAL and the position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be completed.
Only shift fr
om DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal
when shifting between these gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear range.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking
the transmission. The vehicle propulsion system can be
star
ted in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while
the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
bef
ore shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on
a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
When e
xiting the vehicle, always:
● Apply the parking brake.
● Shift the transmission into PARK.
● Turn the ignition OFF.
● Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
This vehicle incorporates an Electric Park Brake
activation feature which engages automatically when
the vehicle is parked on a 9% sloped surface, with the
vehicle pointing up the grade or down the grade.
CAUTION!
● Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could
result.
● DO NOT press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have properly engaged the transmission into the
PARK position:
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
4
● Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
● With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the v
ehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NOTE:
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the vehicle,
the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM) will
broadcast a sound from the rear of the vehicle to warn
nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is approaching. In
addition, the module will indicate a change in speed by
varying the volume of sound.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the propulsion system active.
The vehicle may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if
you must exit the vehicle.
NOTE:
Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the vehicle,
the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM) will
broadcast a sound from the rear of the vehicle (if
moving in the rearward direction) or from the front (if
moving in the forward direction) or from both the front
and rear if vehicle direction cannot be determined, to
warn nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is approaching.
In addition, the module will indicate a change in speed
b
y varying the volume of sound.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
page 177.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
page 280.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
NOTE:
● If the transmission becomes too hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may
illuminat
e, a warning message may appear in the
instrument cluster display and the torque level may
be reduced until the transmission cools down.
● Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the
vehicle, the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM)
will broadcast a sound from the front of the
vehicle to warn nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is
approaching. In addition, the module will indicate a
change in speed by varying the volume of sound.
LOW (L)
This range should be used when descending very steep
grades or when increased regeneration is desired. The
vehicle transmission can be operated continuously in
LOW without damaging the vehicle or causing issues.
Using the L
OW position will increase the rate of
deceleration (along with increasing regeneration of
power into the vehicle’s high voltage battery) when
the accelerator pedal is released in comparison to
the DRIVE position. To access the LOW position, push
down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
Shifting between DRIVE and LOW can be done at any
speed.
NOTE:
● Driving the vehicle in LOW will make the transitions
between vehicle accelerating and coasting, as
well as vehicle coasting and accelerating, more
noticeable.
● Based on the drive gear and/or speed of the
vehicle, the Vehicle Pedestrian Alert Module (VPAM)
will broadcast a sound from the front of the
vehicle to warn nearby pedestrians that a vehicle is
approaching. In addition, the module will indicate a
change in speed by varying the volume of sound.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that
could result in transmission damage, Transmission
Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, vehicle
speed is limited to about 45 mph (72 km/h). In addition
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
to the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL), the Service
Hybrid System Telltale, the Red Turtle indication, and
a pop-up message indicating that vehicle speed may
be limited may all be illuminated. Limp Home Mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer
for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain functionality by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
2. Place the transmission in PARK, if possible. If not,
place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the vehicle
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the vehicle.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is
no longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend
that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your
transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the
traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power
is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater
the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power
transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent
to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause premature wear of the driveline
components.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation system. This system is designed to
address exhaust and engine noise. The system relies
on four microphones embedded in the headliner,
which monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists
an onboard frequency generator, which creates
counteracting sound waves in the audio system’s
speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and
during drive.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system adapts to
different driving conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “Power
Steering System Over Temp” message is displayed on
the instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over
temperature condition in the power steering system.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and
message turn off
page 120.
If the “Service Power Steering" or "Power
Steering Assist Off - Service System”
message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen,
it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an
authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance
page 120.
NOTE:
● Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
4
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
● The power steering system is fully electric; it requires
no power steering fluid.
● If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal, pressing
the accelerator pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will
automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine
parts to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver key
start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must
Occur:
● The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section
page 120.
● The vehicle must be completely stopped.
● The gear select
or must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move
to the zero position and the Stop/Star
t telltale will
illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer
settings will be maintained throughout the Auto Stop/
Start process.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES NOT
AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and
ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information about
the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed
in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start screen.
Situations when the engine will not stop include (but
not limited to):
● If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/Start
OFF button.
● Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
● Driver’s door is not closed.
● Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
● Battery charge is low. During this time a message
will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging”.
● The vehicle is on a steep grade.
● Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
● HV
AC is set to MAX A/C.
● Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
● The transmission is not in a forward gear.
● Hood is open.
● Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
● Accelerator pedal input.
● Engine temperature is too high.
● 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved
from previous Autostop.
● Steering angle is beyond threshold.
● Vehicle is at too high of an altitude.
● Ambient temperature is beyond operating range.
● Stop/Start related system malfunction.
● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of
the items listed.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the accelerator pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage
upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop:
● The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.
146 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
● To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
● HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
● HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
● Batter
y voltage drops too low. During this time a
message will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery
Charging”.
● Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
● Stop/Start related system malfunction.
● Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode will
be disabled
page 120.
Stop/Start OFF Button
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back
ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/START
SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the Stop/
Start OFF switch again (located on the switch bank).
The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A “Service
STOP/START System” message and a yellow Stop/Start
telltale will appear in the instrument cluster display
If the “Service STOP/START System” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle
may not auto start and will need a key start.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system which will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
● If ACC is not enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will
not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be
aware of the feature selected.
● Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable,
and vice versa.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect
a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
● If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed
of the vehicle ahead.
● Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of
the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning system.
● Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected
page 343 .
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
4
WARNING!
● A
daptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traf
fic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all
road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
● The ACC system:
○ Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
○ Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
○ Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
○ Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately three minutes in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not start
moving within three minutes the parking brake
will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
You should not utilize the ACC system:
(Continued)
WARNING!
● When driving in f
og, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
● When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
● When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
● When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel
operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system
settings. The information it displays depends on ACC
system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
until one of the following displa
ys in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
● System Cancel
● Driver Override
● System Off
● ACC Proximity Warning
● ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
● When the brakes are applied
● When the parking brake is applied
● When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or
NEUTRAL
● When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
speed range
● When the brakes are overheated
● When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
● When the driv
er’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The A
CC menu in the instrument cluster
will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time,
the system will turn off and the instrument cluster
display will show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Alw
ays
leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the dif
ferent modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the
Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning
on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32
km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20
mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond
the set speed. If this occurs, the message “Driver
Override” will display in the instrument cluster
display.
● If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while an ACC is enabled, the system will not be
controlling the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
4
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
● The brake pedal is applied
● The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
● The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
● The gear selector is remov
ed from the DRIVE
position
● The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
● The vehicle parking brake is applied
● The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
● Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
● Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
● The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
● The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is
pushed
● The ignition is placed in the OFF position
To Resume
If there is a se
t speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will
display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32
km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being
used.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle is at a standstill longer than two
seconds, the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the
existing set speed.
● ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerat
e
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure
to follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (m
ph)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) butt
on once will result
in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster displa
y.
Metric Speed (km/h)
● Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
● If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
● When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
will automatically slow the vehicle.
● The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
150 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
● The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving
uphill and do
wnhill, the ACC system will cancel
if the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to
the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain
the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected
in the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the
ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the
system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain
the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
● The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
● The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
● The distance setting is changed.
● The system disengages
page 149.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brak
e lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display
and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display
is a warning for the driver to take action and does not
necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set
speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal and will only be active when passing on the
left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle
to a standstill while following the vehicle in front, your
vehicle will resume motion, without the need for any
driver action, if the vehicle in front starts moving within
two seconds.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button,
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
4
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to
the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill
for approximately three consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be canceled.
While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be canceled.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR” WARNING
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such
as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will show “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe
Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels
with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after
the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal
of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of
the vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance items:
● Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
● Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing
so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure
and require a sensor realignment.
● If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged
due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for
service.
● Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC
system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such
as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly
into the sun and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will show
“ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the condition that created limited functionality
is no longer present, the system will return to full
functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstructions, have the windshield and forward
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or
“Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may
be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction
that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating
ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may
need to intervene. The following are examples of these
types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may
move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause
your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed
for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curv
e, the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending
on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane in which you are traveling. In the following
lane changing e
xample, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle
until it's too late for the ACC system to take action.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to
apply the brakes if necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
4
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until
they ha
ve moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles.
For example, ACC will not react in situations where
the vehicle you are following e
xits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider
this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not
previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance be
tween the
rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward
(e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes
may be automatically applied and released when
performing a parking maneuver if the system detects
a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
● The driv
er can override the automatic braking
function by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event, turning ParkSense
off via the ParkSense switch, or changing the gear
while the aut
omatic brakes are being applied.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
● Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
● The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a
detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road
conditions, and brake capability.
● The automatic braking function may not be applied
fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the
rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
● The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system.
● ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected
obstacles when backing up in REVERSE.
NOTE:
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
154 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
For limitations of this system and recommendations,
see
page 159.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased
to less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six Par
kSense sensors located in
the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front
and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view. The front sensors detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120
cm) from the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
These distances depend on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the
vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single arc in the left
and/or right rear region and the syst
em will produce
a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2
second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
4
ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following charts show the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance (in-
ches/cm)
Greater than 79 in-
ches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 in-
ches (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None Single 1/2 Second
Tone
(for rear center
only
Slow
(for rear center
only
Slow
(for rear center
only
Fast
(for rear center
only
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Re-
duced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches (120-100
cm)
39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
4
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on,
when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when
an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is
stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
page 181.
If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the instrument
cluster display.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected in the Uconnect system
page 181.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
page 112. It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch located below
the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will display
the “ParkSense Off” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the “ParkSense Off” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense
is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
system will reject customer input to turn the system
off via the switch. The instrument cluster display will
show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be
Disabled" message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense system
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the "ParkSense Unavailable
Wipe Rear Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Front Sensors", or the "ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" message for five seconds. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
display will show a "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear
Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors"
or "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" pop-up
message for five seconds. After five seconds, a
vehicle graphic will be displayed with a "WIPE OFF" or
“SERVICE” overlay, depending on the location and fault
type. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for
the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
will interrupt the "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear
Sensors", "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors",
or "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" messages
if an object is detected within the five second pop-up
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
If "ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors",
"ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Front Sensors" appears
in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see
an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS
NOTE:
● Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
● Construction equipment, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
● When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “ParkSense Off.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
● When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “ParkSense Off” for as long as the
v
ehicle is in REVERSE.
● ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
● Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system
not working properly. The ParkSense system might
not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the
appropriate fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front
of the appropriate fascia/bumper.
● Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Rear Sensors” message to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
● ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in
the open position. An opened liftgate could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
● There may be a delay in the object detection rate if
the object is moving. This may cause the automatic
braking application to be delayed.
WARNING!
● Driv
ers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
(Continued)
WARNING!
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
● Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia/bumper
when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
● P
arkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
t
o recognize e
v
er
y obstacle, including small
obstacles. P
ar
king curbs might be t
em
porarily
de
t
ect
ed or no
t de
t
ected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
4
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended
to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular
parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking
space, providing audible/visual instructions, and
controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since
the driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a
parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side
(i.e., driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
● The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
● The system is designed to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
● During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed
to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
● The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor
waves).
● New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully
calibrat
ed and performs accurately. This is due to
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve
the performance of the feature.
● The use of wheels and tires that are different size to
the original equipment could affect the operation of
the system.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE PARKSENSE
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system, push the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns
on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
● Parking maneuver is completed.
● Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
when searching for a parking space.
● Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
● Steering wheel is touched during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
● ParkSense switch is pushed.
● The driver’s door is opened.
● The liftgate is opened.
● Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allo
w
a maximum numbers of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within
eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument
cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
following conditions are present:
● The gear selector is in DRIVE.
● The ignition is in the RUN position.
● The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
● The driver’s door is closed.
● The liftgate is closed.
● Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
● The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the previously listed conditions are
not present.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct
the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
160 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING SPACE
ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the default mode is parallel park. A
message, “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK
for Perpendicular Park” will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Push the OK button on the left side
steering wheel switch to change your parking space
setting to parallel or perpendicular. Once the driver
pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the
“Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel
Park” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Active ParkSense Searching
- Press OK for Perpendicular
Active ParkSense Searching -
Press OK for Parallel Park
NOTE:
● When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
vehicle you want to per
form the parking maneuver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
automatically search for a parking space on the
passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is
not activated.
● The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and
clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles,
etc.).
● The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and
free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders,
tailgates, etc., from surrounding objects/vehicles).
● When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending
on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as
possible.
● The f
eature will only indicate the last detected
parking space (example: if passing multiple available
parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last
det
ected parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and
the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to
move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed
to stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes t
o a
standstill (your hands still removed from the steering
wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector
into the REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete before then instructing to check
surroundings and move backward.
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
4
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts
(DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the
steering wheel, before instructing the driver to check
surroundings and complete the par
king maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be instructed
to check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the
vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense
Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed
momentarily.
NOTE:
● It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain a clear line
of sight with the instrument cluster display for driving
instructions during a parking maneuver.
● It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-aut
omatic parking
maneuver.
● It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle
either when instructed to, or when driver intervention
is required.
● When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should
check their surroundings and begin to back up
slowly. All instructions will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
● The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow
a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
within six shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
● The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space. The
system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph
(5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is
then responsible for completing the maneuver if the
system is canceled.
● If the syst
em is canceled during the maneuver for
any reason, the driver must take control of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Alwa
ys
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and
moving forward. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● The P
arkSense Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not de
tected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
● The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that the driver looks
over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system.
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
It uses a forward facing camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the
form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well
as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying force to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the instrument
cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic or a torque warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel
if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push
the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument
cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense syst
em off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
● When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
Telltale
is solid white only when the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready
to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the left side.
● When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the visual warning in the instrument
cluster display will show the left inside lane line
flashing yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line
on the left of the display will remain solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
4
Lane Approached With Flashing
Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure when only the right lane
marking has been detect
ed.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
● When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display
and a torque warning in the st
eering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
● When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
F
or example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift With Solid
Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
● When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/
off) while the left outside line remains solid yello
w.
The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
For e
xample: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached With Flashing
Yellow Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior
for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE
STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone
sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system
page 181.
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
● When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
● The warnings are disabled with use of the turn
signal.
● The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock
Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability
Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see
an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE.
The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the
rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
page 181.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
A t
ouchscreen X button to disable the camera image
is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE
gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of
REVERSE can be disabled through the camera settings
menu with the Uconnect system.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
● To av
oid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the surroundings and Top View of y
our vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or
a different view is selected through the touchscreen
buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which
doors are open. The image will be displayed on the
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
4
touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side
mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
page 181.
Press this button on the touchscreen to
enter the Surround View Camera menu in
the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View system is
exited and the last known screen appears again.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls
menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal
to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is
initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
● If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13
km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen X button, the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
● The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including
the side view mirrors and its projected back up path
based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear
of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances
for each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
Modes Of Operation
Manual activ
ation of the Surr
ound Vie
w syst
em is
select
ed b
y pressing the Surr
ound Vie
w Camera butt
on
locat
ed in the Contr
ols screen within the Uconnect
syst
em.
T
op Vie
w
The T
op Vie
w will sho
w in the Uconnect syst
em with
R
ear Vie
w and F
r
ont Vie
w in a split screen displa
y
.
There is int
egrat
ed P
arkSense arcs in the image at the
front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color
from yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to
the oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
● Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
● Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
● Top View will show which sliding doors are open.
● Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
Rear View. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Front View Plus Top View
Pressing the Front View button will show you
what is immediately in front of the vehicle
and is always paired with the Top View of
the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
Front View. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Back Up Camera View
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom
View.
When the Rear View is being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in to four times
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time will
return the view to the standard Rear View.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay will
display the standard Rear View. If the vehicle is then
returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until
the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and
speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
● If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear
gray.
● While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
● The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13
km/h).
● The vehicle shifted into PARK.
● The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and
the touchscreen X button is pressed.
● The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings
page 181.
NOTE:
● If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lenses.
● If a malfunction with the syst
em has occurred, see
an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safe
ty of your surroundings and must continue
to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
● T
o avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should
only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View
camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
● To avoid vehicle damage, the v
ehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using Surround View.
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a FamCam system
that consists of an interior monitoring camera mounted
on the headliner that allows you to view cargo/
passengers in the rear interior of the v
ehicle through
the Uconnect screen.
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
4
Zoom View
To activate the feature, press the FamCam button
under “Controls” in the Vehicle Menu of the Uconnect
system
page 181. Alternatively, the feature can be
accessed through the App Drawer or a shortcut for the
feature can be added to the Favorites bar at the top of
the screen for quick access.
The display will show the entire vehicle cabin view on
the left side of the display, and a zoomed-in view of a
selected seat on the right side of the display.
FamCam Display (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
To change the seat shown in the zoomed-in view,
press a different seat location on the left side of the
display. The zoomed-in view will then show the new seat
location. By default, the second row driver’s side seat
will be displa
yed in the zoomed-in view.
The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions and
will appear black and white in low-light conditions.
If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the
touchscreen X button, the view will close. Otherwise,
the FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE:
When F
amCam is turned off, the selected seat in the
zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be
retained. The next time the feature is activated, the
same seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper door
s inside the
pipe seal the system.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a v
ehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank af
ter filling.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the ignition
OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (3
o'clock position) and release to open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the
nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear
edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and
then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice
buildup.
168 S
TARTING AND OPERATING
2. Push the fuel filler door release button (located in
the driver's door in the upper map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
3. The button push will initiate a sequence of events
to depressurize the fuel system. A message will
display in the cluster when the vehicle is ready to
be fueled.
Instrument Cluster Message
NOTE:
● After pushing the release button you will have
20 minutes to fuel the vehicle; beyond 20
minutes you will need to push the release
button again.
● Under normal circumstances, the fuel door
could take up to 15 seconds to open. It may
take longer to open in some situations, such as
high ambient temperatures.
● If you hear a hissing sound when the nozzle is
inserted into the filler pipe, wait to begin fueling
the vehicle until after the hissing sound stops.
4. The fuel door pops away from the vehicle when it
has been released. To finish opening the fuel door,
manually rotate it away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
● If the service station fuel pump repeatedly
clicks off (stops delivering fuel) before the fuel
tank has been filled, push the fuel door release
button again.
● If pushing the fuel door release button a second
time does not correct the problem, try using
a different fuel pump. If premature fuel pump
shutoff continues to be a problem, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
● If the fuel door does not re-latch upon closure,
push the fuel door release button again to
reset the latch. If pushing the fuel door release
button a second time does not correct the
problem, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
5. There is no fuel filler cap. Tw
o flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
6. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
7. Fill the vehicle with fuel. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
8. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel nozzle
to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
9. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on the rear
outer edge near the center.
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
4
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
1. Put the vehicle in the PARK position.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
● A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a por
table
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank af
ter filling.
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Place the vehicle's ignition to the RUN position
(Propulsion System Not Active).
NOTE:
If this is not performed, then the tank vent v
alve
will not open. This will result in premature fuel
pump shut-offs.
2. Access the storage bin located behind the rear
cargo trim panel.
3. Remove access cover in the upper right corner.
Access Cover Location
4. After removing green handle from retention
bracket, gently pull the green handle directly away
from the bracket t
o release the fuel door.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
NOTE:
Excessive force may break cable tether.
5. Reinstall handle back into bracket when
comple
ted.
6. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your
vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, y
our vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH)
number is included on this label and indicates the
Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front
and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR
and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of
the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in
the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in
the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability, do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle
for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle
fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants
or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo
are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready
for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately to
be sure that the load is properly distributed over the
front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show
that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has
been exceeded but the total load is within the specified
GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear
or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low
and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and
the way the brakes operate.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose contr
ol. Overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
NOTE:
Trailer towing is not permitted for the Hybrid Models.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably
do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
page 170.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating
(GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
4
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
fr
ont or rear GAWR
page 170.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
fr
ont or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load
on y
our vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied by
the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction
associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any
unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if eq
uipped), recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel
brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to
eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball
or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These
kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and
medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering
more consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused
by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively
to tow vehicle and trailer stability. TSC and a weight-
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended
for heavier TW and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
WARNING!
● An im
properly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
● Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or
a reputable R
ecreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
TRAILER HIT
CH
CLASSIFICA
TION
The f
ollo
wing chart pr
o
vides the industr
y standar
d
f
or the maximum trailer w
eight a given trailer hitch
class can t
o
w and should be used to assist you in
selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Model Trailer Tow Package GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
Touring L FWD Yes (Road Tripper) 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Touring L AWD Yes (Road Tripper) 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,550 lb (1,610 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Limited FWD/AWD Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Pinnacle FWD Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,550 lb (1,610 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
Pinnacle AWD Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
4
Model Trailer Tow Package GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
● The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire And Loading Information Placard.
● Trailer towing is not permitted with the hybrid
vehicle.
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight the
vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
● Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of
vehicle, full fluids, no occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
● For calculation purposes, average weight of an
occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
● GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)
● CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
● Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6,005 lb (2,723
kg) - 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb (682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
● 1
,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb [68
kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3,600 lb [1,632 kg])
= 545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb (163
kg)
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg)
1,205 lb
(546 kg)
1,205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) = 845
lb (383 kg)
845 lb
(383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg)
955 lb
(433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) – 360
lb (163 kg) = 545 lb
(247 kg)
545 lb
(247 kg)
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicles using an aftermar-
ket trailer hitch
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1,200 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Max Trailer TW, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer TW 360 lb (163
kg)
7 people / 1,050 lb (476 kg)
455 lb
(206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) – 360
lb (163 kg) = 95 lb (43
kg)
95 lb
(43 kg)
● Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or
rear axles.
● GAWR is found on the certification label affixed to
the driver’s side door jamb.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
● The tongue weight of the trailer.
● The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
● The weight of the driv
er and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds t
o the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle
page 317.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines are
recommended.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the ne
w v
ehicle is driv
en. The engine,
axle or o
ther par
ts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Then, during the f
irst 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps the engine and other par
ts of the vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in “Scheduled
Servicing”
page 283. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
● Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be diff
icult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
4
WARNING!
● When hauling cargo or t
owing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or
damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission,
st
eering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
● Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
● Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block
or "chock" the trailer wheels.
● GCWR must not be exceeded.
● Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
○ GVWR
○ GTW
○ GAWR
○ Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
Towing Requirements — Tires
● Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
● Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
● Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the
safe and satisf
actory operation of your vehicle.
● Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
● Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer
.
● Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
● For further information
page 313.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
● Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the
trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and
possible personal injury.
● An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped
with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an
electronic brake controller is not required.
● Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
WARNING!
● Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
(Continued)
WARNING!
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
● Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead
to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brak
e pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer To
w Package may include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
● Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s
electrical connectors) before launching a boat into
water.
● Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing
up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent
shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on
steep downhill grades, select the LOW range.
● Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
● When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
● Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads
to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
4
Cruise Control — If Equipped
TRAILER TOWING — HYBRID
Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
● To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB)
engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park
Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
(if rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto
Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the
customer programmable features
page 182.
● When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
● If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
towing service, for further information
page
280.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
CAUTION!
● DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains
released, while being t
owed.
● Towing this vehicle in violation of the
previously stated requirements can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from improper
to
wing is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
to
w dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
f
ollowing the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do
not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the par
king brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind
another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for
a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
● Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
● Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
● Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
● Keep tires properly inflated.
● Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and pre
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
w
ater is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path's
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Warnings
and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
● Driving thr
ough standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
● Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
● Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
4
● Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
● Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
●
●
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles
in the way before driving through the standing
water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
● Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not
continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5NAV
With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect
Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes
only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features
in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working
with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate
steps as needed. As always, if you experience unusual
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately,
page 340, or refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for additional contact information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
● As always, if y
ou experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
immediately.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of
a security breach, vehicle owner
s should routinely
check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons
on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate
located on the center of the instrument panel. These
buttons allow you to access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can vary by
vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn
the contr
ol knob to scroll through menus and change
settings. Push the center of the control knob one or
more times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE butt
ons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap
the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the
radio.
MULTIMEDIA 181
5
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab at the top of the touchscreen. In this menu,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
● Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the
setting is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to
the screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode This setting will allo
w you to set the brightness manually or have the system set
it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
182 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode This setting will adjust the radio theme mode. The options are "Light", "Dark", and
"Auto".
Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100
km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
MULTIMEDIA 183
5
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
Display Mode
The setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows
for more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access
this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio.
Theme Mode This setting will adjust the radio theme mode. The options are "Light", "Dark", and
"Auto".
Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Con-
sumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100
km, or km/L) units of measurement independently.
184 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
System Text Size
This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, and
“Taller”.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 185
5
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
options.
New Text Message Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings This setting will allow you to customize the settings within Navigation Mode.
Auto-On Comfort This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
186 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Sub-
menu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is
in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the
FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have
the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting
will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible
chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide
an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system “Off” or “Warning +
Active Braking”.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected.
The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected.
The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual
display when an object is detected.
MULTIMEDIA 187
5
Setting Name Description
Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings
are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting
will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights + Chime”
setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Rear Seat Alert When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is
running, or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a
message will appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
188 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will
control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time This setting will allow you to manually set the time of your clock.
Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a
12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date by day, month, and year (DD/MM/YY).
Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will
decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or
smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 189
5
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb This setting will open the Do Not Disturb Settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply”
(both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply
Message” (create message).
Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Voice — If Equipped
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or
“Female”.
Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off.
Voice Barge-In This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off.
190 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List
and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will
turn the Command List off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which
icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 191
5
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors
will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
192 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
● When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle
purchase.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it tak
es for the headlights to shut
off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 193
5
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The
“Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press”
setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
194 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are
needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver
door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all
doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on
or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been
linked to the key fob.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or sense an
obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening. Selectable options
are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power liftgate.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands Free Power Sliding Door
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power sliding
doors. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 195
5
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been
activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off”
setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut
off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout This setting will activate the 3rd row seat recline lockout. Selectable options are “Off”,
“Lock On Ignition”, and “Always Locked”.
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
196 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after
the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The
available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within
the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/
right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
MULTIMEDIA 197
5
Setting Name Description
Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the
volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”,
“1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto On Radio This setting will automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall
whether it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The selectable options are “On”, “Off”,
and “Recall Last”.
Volume Adjustment This setting allows you to adjust the volume levels for features such as Media, Phone,
Navigation, and Voice Recognition.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sound This setting will turn the Notification chime on or off.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
198 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Description
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Popups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns navigation pop-ups on or off.
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
● A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
● Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profiles & Settings This setting will allow you to view your SiriusXM® account information, profiles linked
to the system, and the various settings you have saved and stored to those profiles.
Block Explicit This setting will allo
w you to block explicit content by turning it on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 199
5
Accessibility — If Equipped
When pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the system will display options related to the vehicle’s theater system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Accessibility
The Accessibility feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected
when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example,
when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play button
selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action.
Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display information on updating the Uconnect system’s software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for
the setting are “On” and “Off”.
200 MULTIMEDIA
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can
clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will restart the radio.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
MULTIMEDIA 201
5
Setting Name Description
Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data
from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password for Projection This setting will reset your Wi-Fi password for projection.
Factory Reset This setting will factory reset the radio. It may cause the radio to restart multiple times
and the backup camera, radio, SOS, and several driving assistance features will not
be available. Once the system resets, you will need to turn the vehicle off then back on
to complete the process.
202 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the
rocker switch increases the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button makes
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are
in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
in each mode:
RADIO OPERA
TION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station, and pushing the bottom of the switch
will seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of
the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
● Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray™ Discs.
● Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV via
Miracast capable devices.
● Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port.
● Listen to audio over wired or wireless headphones
(not included, customer will have to provide their
own or play audio through in-cabin speakers with
Listen In feature in front seat).
● Plug and play a variety of devices into the front seat
Video USB port. USB ports located under the rear
screens are charge only.
● Watch content individually on each rear display or
mirror across both displays to watch together.
NOTE:
Vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular
range and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5
NAV system and Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV package. Streaming requires a Wi-Fi connection
and registered Amazon account to run Fire TV in
the vehicle. Streaming service subscriptions are not
included. Services and features are subject to change
or withdrawal at any time, may not be available in
all areas and languages, and may require separate
subscriptions.
MULTIMEDIA 203
5
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT (RSE) WITH
AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF
EQUIPPED
OVERVIEW
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content
from popular apps (subscriptions may be required).
Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get
information, and watch downloaded programs all while
on the road. Two Voice Remotes with Alexa
are included with the system. Press the Microphone
button on the Voice Remote with Alexa to easily find,
launch, and control content. Check sports scores, play
music, control smart home devices, or see your live
camera feeds (compatible smart home device required
and sold separately). In addition to streaming and
downloaded content, changing the input in Fire TV also
enables you to:
GETTING STARTED
Rear Seat Entertainment For Uconnect 5/5 NAV
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen)
2 — Headphone Jack
3 — HDMI Port
4 — USB C Charging Port
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
There are three different ways to operate the features
of Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in:
● Voice Remote with Alexa
● Front radio screen
● Individual rear touchscreens for Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in touch on each
rear screen
ACCESSING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN FROM
THE FRONT RADIO
SCREEN
You can access y
our Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system by following these steps:
Option 1
1. Press the Media button.
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.
Option 2
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to different
pages in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect
Theater button.
ACCESSING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH
FIRE TV BUILT-IN FROM THE REAR SCREENS
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire
TV built-in system from the rear screens by just flipping
the screens open. Flipping open the rear screens will
automatically turn the system on. Tapping either rear
screen will also turn on the system for that respective
screen.
NOTE:
When using the rear screens, the system will launch
with Fire TV.
204 MULTIMEDIA
FIRST TIME STARTING UP (USING THE REAR
SCREENS)
Boot-up Screen
When turning on the system for the first time from
the rear screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the
system displaying the Fire TV logo.
During this boot-up sequence, language options will be
available for the system.
Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing
After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will
then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa
(two are included with the system).
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair a Voice
Remote with Alexa to the system. Two Voice Remotes
with Alexa are included to be paired with each rear
screen.
A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each rear
screen. It will function with the rear screen it was paired
with. The pairing steps will need to be done for each
rear screen.
NOTE:
If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen
instructions will appear for trying to pair again.
Connecting to a Network
During the start-up process, the system will need to be
connected to a network to function. Multiple network
sources can be options for the system.
● Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if
activated, it will show as a possible network for the
system on the screen).
● Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.
● In-vehicle Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
When a network is connected to the system for the first
time, an over-the-air-software update will take place
using the Wi-Fi connection. It is recommended that an
unlimited Wi-Fi connection, if available, be used during
this update. After this first-time update, updates will
only occur when one is available.
Account Sign-in
The next step will be the option to sign in to your
Amazon account.
There are two options to sign into the system:
● I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an
already existing Amazon account
● I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the on-
screen steps to set up an Amazon account with the
system.
Parental Controls
Another feature that will appear during this first time
set up is parental controls.
When the parental controls page appears, it will
give the options “Enable Parental Controls” and “No
Parental Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is
selected, follow the on-screen steps to set up parental
contr
ols for the system.
ALEXA VOICE CONTROL
A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is
simple to get started using this feature. Push the
Microphone button at the top of the Voice Remote with
Alexa to activate Alexa and get started.
LISTEN VIA VEHICLE SPEAKERS
A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV
built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front
radio Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button
in the top right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2.
This will allow you to have either rear screen play audio
through all the speakers in the vehicle.
QUICK MENU
Accessing the quick menu will give you more options for
Fire TV.
To access the quick menu, tap the screen and it will
appear. The quick menu is also accessible by pushing
the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with
Alexa.
Some options of the quick menu are:
● Power — This will power the screen off.
● On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the on-screen
remote to use with the system.
● Back — This will let you go back a page.
● Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
● Gear/Se
ttings — This will let you access certain
settings in the system. For more setting options,
select “Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings
menu.
● Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From
here you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are
We There Yet? app.
PARENTAL CONTROLS (USING THE REAR
SCREENS)
If parental controls were not set during the first time
start up of the system, they can be set by following
these steps:
1
. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa or tap the screen to access
Settings in the “quick menu”.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.
5. Select “Parental Controls”; from here you can turn
Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the
controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA PAIRING (USING
THE REAR SCREENS)
If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired
again or a new remote is being paired, follow these
procedures:
MULTIMEDIA 205
5
Some options for a network connection are:
1. Install batteries into the remote.
2. Tap the screen and Select the Gear/Settings icon
on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”.
6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with
Alexa pairing.
A long press on the Home button can also re-
pair a Voice Remote with Alexa that has become
disconnected.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with
Alexa. A Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired to each
rear screen. It will function with the rear screen it was
paired with. The pairing steps will need to be done for
each rear screen.
MEDIA SOURCES INPUT (USING THE FRONT
RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Front Radio Screen
Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs”
are “Fire TV”, “HDMI”, “Blu-ray™”, “DVD”, and “USB”.
Rear Screens
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the
Fire TV Home screen and select your desired input
under “Input”.
Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the
top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for
selection options.
NOTE:
The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on
the naming of the vehicle’s brand.
VOICE REMOTE WITH ALEXA
Voice Remote With Alexa
1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected
channel on or off.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has
options by pressing the Circle button U
p, Down,
Left, or Right to navigate on-screen for selections
and pushing the center button to confirm
selections.
3. Back — Push t
o exit out of menus or return to the
previous screen.
4. Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home
screen.
5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push and hold
to fast rewind through the current audio track or
video chapter. Push once to revert back to the
previous track.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the
volume and + button to increase the volume.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel
guide for the system.
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Prime Video — Push to launch Prime Video app.
10. App 1 — Push to navigate to App 1.
11. Microphone Button — Push to activate Alexa.
12. Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu.
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast
forward through the current audio track or video
chapter. Push once to skip to the next track.
14. Play/Pause Button ‖ — Begin/resume or pause
disc play.
15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow
button on the Channel button to browse channels
available in Fire TV.
206 MULTIMEDIA
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed content
on Fire TV.
17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options
for Fire TV.
18. App 2 — Push to launch App 2.
19. Vehicle Button — Push to activate the Vehicle
menu.
Replacing the Voice Remote with Alexa
Batteries
Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA
batteries for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of
the Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery
cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery
recycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside the
battery compartment.
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV
BUILT-IN STREAMING (USING THE FRONT
RADIO AND REAR SCREENS)
Access Using Launch Source
To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
from the front radio, press the Media tab located on
the bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option
located on the top menu bar. Select “Launch Source”,
and then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”.
Access Using Browse Media
Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen
will give access to different media within Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
These options will be in the top menu of “Browse
Media” and include:
● Fire TV — Selecting “Fire TV” will show streaming
options for categories and to select apps. This option
will be selectable on the left slider menu in “Browse
Media”. While in “Browse Media” under Fire TV, it
will display recent activity under “Recent”. This will
display recent videos viewed from Fire TV and recent
downloads as well.
● USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
● USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear
that are options with a USB device connected to
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear
Screens
Rear passengers will be able to access some options
for streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “App 1”,
or “App 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.
Selecting one of those buttons on the Voice Remote
with Alexa will take you to the home page for that
respective streaming service. Turning on either of the
rear screens will launch Fire TV. By default, the rear
screens will always launch in Fire TV. More streaming
options can be select
ed on the Fire TV home page.
Fire TV
Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear
Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
NOTE:
A data source needs to be connected to the system for
streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when
Fire TV is turned on for the first time from the rear
screens. Some of these options can be an in-vehicle
4G Wi-Fi hot spot, capable Wi-Fi hot spot from a mobile
device, or Wi-Fi from an outside source like a home or a
garage.
To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch
Source” on the front touchscreen, rear seat screen, and
then “Fire TV Home” under “Inputs”.
Viewing from the front radio screen mirrors or controls
the Fire TV experience from one of the rear Fire TV
displays.
The menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for
“Home”, “Find”, “Library”, “Brand”, and “Live”.
Below the menu bar will be streaming options linked to
your Prime account like “Prime Video”.
The front radio screen offers some options:
● Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.
● Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles
between the Rear Screens (for use with front radio
screen only).
● Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen,
this will collapse the screen to dashboard view.
MULTIMEDIA 207
5
● Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer”
and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.
● Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media”
pop-up.
● Back — This will let you go back the previous page.
● Fire T
V Home — This will take you back to the Fire TV
home page.
● Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.
● Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
remote.
NOTE:
Front radio screen mirroring and watching can only be
done when the vehicle is in PARK. The vehicle must
be in an active and usable cellular range and properly
equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV package. For streaming, a
Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon account are
required to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service
subscriptions are not included. Services and features
are subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may
not be available in all areas and languages, and may
require separate subscriptions.
PLAY A BLU-RAY™ OR DVD — IF EQUIPPED
Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Front Radio Screen
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up.
NOTE:
The DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player is located under the
radio controls in the instrument panel.
2. Press the Media button on the bottom menu bar.
Then press the R
ear Entertainment tab on the top
menu bar. Then select “Launch Source” on the
radio touchscreen.
3. Select the Blu-ray™ or DVD under inputs in the
Launch Source menu
4. To play a Blu-ra
y™ or DVD disc on both screens
simultaneously, select “Launch Source” and then
under Inputs, select “View Screen 1 or 2”.
DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player
1 — DVD/Blu-ray™ Player
2 — USB Port
NOTE:
To view video content on the radio screen, bring the
vehicle to a stop.
Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Rear Screens
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or D
VD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up.
2. Scroll down on the Fire TV Home screen and select
Blu-ray™ or DVD input under “Input”.
FIRE TV APPS/GAMES (USING THE REAR
SCREENS
)
Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.
To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system
and select “Find” in the top menu. On the Find page,
select “App store®”. Within the App store® you can
purchase apps and games. From here you can also
select from all the apps and games that have been
purchased.
USING THE VIDEO USB PORT
Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play
your favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB
drive into the port next to the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player.
The USB drive port is located under the radio controls in
the instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of the
USB device by going to the USB source in the inputs.
Use the search feature to find your media faster.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI
ports located behind either of the first row seats.
208 MULTIMEDIA
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the power
limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter
page 91
.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not
come equipped with headphones. Customers will need
to provide their own wireless headphones that can be
paired with the system using Bluet
ooth®. Customers
can also use their own wired headphones and plug
them into a Headphone Jack located under one of the
rear screens.
Wireless Headphones Pairing
To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat
Entertainment with Fire TV built-in using the rear
screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth®
Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the
on-screen steps for pairing.
While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will
output audio at a time.
REAR CLIMATE C
ONTROLS
The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in
page
75.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the
Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select
the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the
Voice Remote with Alexa. Then select the Rear Climate
Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls include:
Icon Description
ON
Climate Control ON Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
OFF
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
SYNC SYNC Button
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
MULTIMEDIA 209
5
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The
temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
Headliner
Mode
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
210 MULTIMEDIA
Icon Description
1,2,3, etc.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will
cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
LEGAL & COMPLIANCE
To access Legal and Compliance information about
Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the
rear screens, follow these steps:
1. Push the Gear/Se
ttings button on the Voice
Remote with Alexa or tap the screen.
2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen.
4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV”
and then “Legal & Compliance”.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on
in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance
from y
our radio. This condition may be lessened or
eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within
the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or off
during mobile phone operation when not using the
Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output pow
er of the internal wireless radio
is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure
limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in
such a manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or
further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted
in some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on
the wireless radio
page 343.
MULTIMEDIA 211
5
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
● ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
● Brake pedal pulsations
● A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
● The ABS contains sophisticat
ed electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability
. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
● Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
● The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
● The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
● The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is
on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits
of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
REGENERATIVE BRAKING SYSTEM (RBS) -
HYBRID MODELS
The RBS replenishes the vehicle's high voltage battery
during deceleration, and is particularly useful in stop-
and-go city traffic. The electric motors that propel
the vehicle forward can operate as generators when
braking. The RBS recharges the high voltage battery
under certain braking conditions by recapturing energy
that would otherwise be lost while braking. The electric
power that is generated goes back into the high voltage
battery for later use, for example, when acceleration is
desired.
212 SAFETY
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction brakes,
regenerative braking, or a combination to slow the
vehicle. If the system detects slippery conditions while
braking, ONLY friction is used to slow the vehicle.
The RBS can result in extended life of the hydraulic
service brakes; however, all inspection, scheduled
maintenance, and service intervals for the vehicle
brakes must be followed.
AUDIBLE PEDESTRIAN WARNING SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an Audible Pedestrian
Warning system. The Audible Pedestrian Warning
system uses distinct sounds to alert pedestrians that
your vehicle is approaching. In addition, the module will
indicate changes in vehicle speed by varying the
relative volume.
The system uses an in-vehicle sound synthesizer with
two external speakers. One is located in the under-hood
compartment and the other is in the rear of
the vehicle. The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is
active when the vehicle is not in PARK and is stopped or
traveling at lower speeds. Depending on the selected
gear (REVERSE, DRIVE, LOW or NEUTRAL), the system
activates the corresponding speaker location based on
the intended direction of travel.
NOTE:
The system is active when driving in Electric mode only.
WARNING!
The Audible Pedestrian Warning system is not
intended to avoid a collision. It is always the driver's
responsibility to be attentive to the vehicle’s distance
between other vehicles, people, and objects, and
most importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning could result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brak
e Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control
System (TCS).These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain
Brake Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can
help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pum
p” the brakes). Do not reduce
brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is
not functioning pr
operly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
SAFETY 213
6
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering
(EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC
module is de
tecting vehicle instability. The torque that
the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the
driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification
the driver receives that the feature is active, is the
torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize
the correct course of action through small torques on
the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque.
It is very important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible
for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done
to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the
rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel
lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot pre
vent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,
striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially
those that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriat
e wheel(s) to assist
in counteracting these conditions. Engine power may
also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
● Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
● Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activ
ation/Malfunction Indicator Light located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
● Electr
onic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot
prev
ent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
● Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the handling
characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively
affect the performance of the ESC system.
(Continued)
214 SAFETY
WARNING!
Changes to the steering system, suspension,
braking system, tire type and size or wheel size
may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade
ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or
poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the
effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will
be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only
be used f
or specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off
in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable
to allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished
by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button to ent
er
partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back
on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This
may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
● When in “P
artial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been disabled
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be
illuminated. When in “Partial Of
f” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled,
and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
● Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If
this light remains on aft
er several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be
sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
● The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
● Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
● The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete
stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake
while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
SAFETY 215
6
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
● The feature must be enabled.
● The vehicle must be stopped.
● The parking brake must be off.
● The driver door must be closed.
● The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
● The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).
● HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the
transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will no
t activ
at
e and slight r
olling ma
y occur
,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded v
ehicle, or
while pulling a trailer
. HSA is no
t a substitut
e f
or
activ
e driving in
v
olv
ement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
page 181.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance t
o mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
● If y
ou use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down
an incline while resuming acceleration, manually
activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
● HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also,
be certain to place the transmission in PARK.
● Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of
brake pressure to remove any w
ater buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield
wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction
is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB ma
y reduce the time req
uired t
o reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates
when an emergency braking situation ma
y occur b
y
monitoring ho
w f
ast the thr
o
ttle is released b
y the
driv
er
. The Electr
onic Brake Control (EBC) system will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you through a visual and auditory
notification of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats if a rear door was
opened up to 10 minutes before the ignition was placed
in the ON/RUN position. RSRA does not directly detect
objects, passengers, or pets in the rear seats. When
the previous conditions are met, RSRA displays the
message “Check Rear Seat” on the instrument cluster
display and sounds an auditory alert upon the driver
placing the ignition in the OFF position to exit the
vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
page 181.
WARNING!
● Bef
ore exiting a vehicle, always come to
a complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake.
● Always make sure the k
eyless ignition node is in
the OFF position, key fob is removed from the
vehicle and vehicle is locked.
(Continued)
216 SAFETY
WARNING!
● Ne
ver leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
t
ouch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the
TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce vehicle power to pr
ovide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC
cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations
page 171.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
applied to individual wheels t
o attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to de
tect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors
to let the driver know the system is operational. The
BSM syst
em sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK (P).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror
and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the
rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
● The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
● The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change
if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
SAFETY 217
6
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the
trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may
result in false detections. The BSM Warning Light
may even remain illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear.
● The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side
mirror warning indicator lights when a motorcycle or
any small object remains at the side of the vehicle
for extended periods of time (more than a couple of
seconds).
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice,
and dirt/road contaminants so the BSM system can
function properly. Do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.).
Sensor Location
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contaminants or foreign objects, a message will warn
you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in
side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear the fascia/bumper area around the
sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage,
cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on again
to reset the system.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling
the ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a
blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding
an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
page 220.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM syst
em
will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
V
ehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with a
relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
218 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains
in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the
warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in
speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls,
foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This
is normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
page 343.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
t
o help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The
BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians,
bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, alw
ays check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of
the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then ha
ve a clear view of
the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected,
alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side
of the vehicle with a minimum speed of appro
ximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking
lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if
your vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the
SAFETY 219
6
system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the
opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot
situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up,
even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available in
the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected
object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of
the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present
on the same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible
alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision.
The warnings and limited braking are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force,
the system will compensate and provide additional
brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning
with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely,
the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. If a pedestrian is
encountered in the path at the same speed threshold,
the system will attempt to bring the vehicle to a stop.
220 SAFETY
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated
page 343.
NOTE:
● The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2
km/h).
● The FCW alerts ma
y be triggered on objects other
than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based
on the course prediction. This is expected and is a
part of normal FCW activation and functionality.
● It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking
events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion
of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
● The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to
the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in fr
ont of you.
Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be available
in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will
remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
page
181.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual
warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier w
arnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the
system provides possible collision warnings on objects
closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings
and provides less reaction time than the "Far" and
"Medium" settings, which allows for a more dynamic
driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
● Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking,
or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual
warnings.
● Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
● The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
SAFETY 221
6
● FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in
the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are
far away, oncoming traffic, or leading v
ehicles with
the same or higher rates of speed.
● FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality”, “FCW Limited Functionality”, “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”, or
“FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may not
be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system
will return to its full performance state. If the problem
persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
● ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
● FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If
Eq
uipped
PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system which provides
the driver with audible and visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display, and may apply automatic
braking when it detects a potential frontal collision with
a pedestrian/cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph (60
km/h), the system may provide braking to mitigate
the potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the
PEB ev
ent stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes. When the system determines
a collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you
is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5
km/h).
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect
every type of potential collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a
collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
page 181.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning
Active Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with the
pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. The system
will reset to the default setting when the vehicle is
restarted.
222 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS W
arning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color, or the
Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message. When
this occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases,
the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should
always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has
not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See
page 313 for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to w
arn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving
the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning
Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value
page 343.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to
be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above
the recommended cold placard pressure in order to
turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
● The TPMS has been optimized f
or the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor
is no
t designed for use on aftermarket wheels
and may contribute to a poor overall system
performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper
TPMS feature operation.
● Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor
to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
● After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
● The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
● The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
SAFETY 223
6
● Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may aff
ect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
● The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
Warning Light.
● Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors,
mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and
to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
● Receiver module
● Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
● Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
● Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a syst
em fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SER
VICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
● Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
● Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals
● Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
● Using tire chains on the vehicle
● Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place
of a r
oad tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color
pressure value.
3. Af
ter driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place
of the compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument
cluster will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
224 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate
to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure v
alues in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value
as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the
syst
em receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to
their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies
that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24
km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will
no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display
the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will
no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS FEATURES
● Seat Belt Systems
● Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
● Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or may
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position
page
243.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front
SAFETY 225
6
passenger seat, move the seat as far back as
possible and use the proper child restraint
page 243.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs,
the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the
space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see
page 340 for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● Ne
ver install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road ma
y be a poor
driver and could cause a collision that includes you.
This can happen far away from home or on your own
street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce
the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused
by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor
vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder
System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts.
The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will
signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder
Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the
BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat
belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to
buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
226 SAFETY
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal
or other items are placed on the outboard front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained
in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the
seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always w
ear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
● In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
● It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also provided at their
seating position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
● Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
(Continued)
WARNING!
● T
wo people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
one another in a collision, hurting one another
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt
for more than one person, no matt
er what their
size.
WARNING!
● A lap belt w
orn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as lo
w as possible and keep it snug.
● A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists.
If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle,
take it to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
● A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion
could ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into
the buckle nearest you.
● A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
● A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
(Continued)
SAFETY 227
6
WARNING!
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the
arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
● A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
● A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is
involved in a collision, or if you have questions
regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take
your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles eq
uipped with a rear seat). Grab the
latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the
shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any, slack so it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6. T
o release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract
to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins
immediately above the latch plate.
228 SAFET
Y
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot
at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push
or squeeze the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. Aft
er you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
t
o make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the
upward position without pushing or squeezing the
release button. T
o verify the shoulder belt anchorage is
latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
● W
earing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your
seat belt saf
ely and to keep your passengers safe,
too.
● Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any, slack so it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
● Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
● Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And
Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row
center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch
plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt t
o detach
from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be
stored out of the way in the headliner for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the headliner
slightly behind the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
SAFETY 229
6
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left
head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plat
e int
o the mini-buckle until y
ou hear
a “click
.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plat
e int
o the buckle until y
ou hear a “click.”
Latch Plate And Buckle Connected
7. Position the lap belt so it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the
shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
8. P
osition the shoulder belt on your chest so it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
230 SAFET
Y
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-
buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The
seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
into its stowed position.
Insert Regular Latch Plate
Into Mini-Buckle Slot To Detach
WARNING!
● If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the risk
of injury in a collision.
● When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twist
ed. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch
plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable
upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its
lowest position, an authorized dealer can pro
vide you
with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender
should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for
a different occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
● ONL
Y use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the cent
er of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
● Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when
the lap belt is not long enough and only use in
the recommended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the str
ong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove
slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the
seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
SAFETY 231
6
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint
system. The figures illustrate the locking feature for
each seating position
page 251.
Seven Passenger Bench Seat
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Seven Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Eight Passenger Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear
a clicking sound as the seat belt re
tracts. Allow the
webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract
to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
232 SAFETY
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
fr
ont seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, y
ou will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
● The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
(Continued)
WARNING!
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
● Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
● Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or
children who are using booster seats. The locked
mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a
park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate
over the stitching t
o shorten the lap portion of the belt
and install the car seat normally. When the car seat is
removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above
the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seat
belt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the
lower trim behind the third r
ow. This clip is used to hold
the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third
row seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip
while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the
webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain
an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
SAFETY 233
6
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third
row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain
an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned
properly on the occupant and they could be more
seriously injured in an accident as a result.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or ma
y
be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure,
ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● F
ront and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioner
s
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitor
s the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the
air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first
in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air
Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to
be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs,
have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
● The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position.
● The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four
to eight-second interval.
● The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your
protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean y
ou won’t have the air bag system
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on af
ter you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air
234 SAFETY
Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared.
In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately
page 120.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts
for both the driver and front passenger. The front
air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger front
air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above
the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
● Being t
oo close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the st
eering wheel or
instrument panel.
● Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the sev
erity and type
of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during
an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low
energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher
energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that det
ects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust
the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based
upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
● No objects should be placed o
ver or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
● Do not put anything on or around the air bag
cover
s or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
SAFETY 235
6
WARNING!
● R
elying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always w
ear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air
bags are not expected t
o reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some
that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and
angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location
of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves
are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag
should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects
a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the
inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is
generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it
takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then q
uickly
deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
● Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor.
The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine
the fr
ont passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The
ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as
designed, it is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rat
e of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
● The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
● The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
● The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air Bag
Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deploy-
ment
Child, including a child in
a f
orward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power deploy-
ment OR Full-power de-
plo
yment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deploy-
ment
236 SAFETY
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint
system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the
front passenger seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
● Never install a rear-f
acing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
● Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated
weight on the front passenger seat and where
that weight is located. The OCS communicates the
classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification t
o determine whether the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
● Sitting upright
● Facing forward
● Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
● Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
F
ront Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is
working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS
determines the most probable classification of the
occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front
passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight,
which ma
y result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Decreasing the fr
ont passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on
the front passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
● The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest
or instrument panel).
● The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
● The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
● The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
● Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
● Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
● Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
● Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may
SAFETY 237
6
provide an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
● If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
(Continued)
WARNING!
occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing
forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
● Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger
seat. Holding an object may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different than the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, which
may result in serious injury or death in a collision.
● Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately
.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger,
the OCS components must function as designed. Do
238 SAFETY
not make any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
● Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
● Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
● Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
● Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
● At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related component
or fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
● U
napproved modifications or service procedures
to the passenger seat assembly, its related
components, seat cover or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment in
case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the fr
ont passenger
if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
(Continued)
WARNING!
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
● If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved int
eraction with the front air
bags.
WARNING!
● Do no
t drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
● Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front
Passenger Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below
the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air
Bags pr
ovide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mount
ed Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a
label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help reduce the risk of occupant injur
y
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deplo
ys, it opens the seam on the
outboar
d side of the seatback’s trim co
ver
. The inflating
SAB deplo
ys thr
ough the seat seam int
o the space
be
tw
een the occupant and the door
. The SAB mo
v
es
at a v
er
y high speed and with such a high f
orce that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated properly,
SAFETY 239
6
or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering
the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
po
tential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys do
wnward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge
of the headliner out of the way and co
vers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure
occupants if they are not belted and seated properly,
or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury
from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
● Do no
t mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and its
deployment path are located should remain free
from any obstructions.
● In order for the SABICs t
o work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air
Bags in a particular impact ev
ent is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
response to impact events. The system is calibrated
t
o deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some
side collisions that do not impact the area of the
passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front
air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
● Occupants, including children, who are up against
or v
ery close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door,
side windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
● Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary f
or your protection in all collisions.
(Continued)
240 SAFETY
WARNING!
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear
their seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that
is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
● Side Air Bags need r
oom to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
● Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured
or killed.
● R
elying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pret
ensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deplo
y in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
● Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
● Air Bag Warning Light
● Steering Wheel and Column
● Instrument Panel
● Knee Impact Bolsters
● Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
● Seat Belt Buckle Switch
● Supplemental Side Air Bags
● Supplemental Knee Air Bags
● F
ront and Side Impact Sensors
● Seat Belt Pretensioner
s
● Seat Track Position Sensors
● Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediat
ely
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
● The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants
as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions
are similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They
are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly. However,
if you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
● As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-product
of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used
for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have
skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
SAFETY 241
6
particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
● Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
● After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
● Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
● Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
● Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.
● T
urn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from
the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
Syst
em.
● Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of
these other functions in response to the Enhanced
Accident Response System:
● Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
● Cut off battery power to the:
○ Engine
○ Electric Motor (if equipped)
○ Electric power steering
○ Brake booster
○ Electric park brake
○ Automatic transmission gear selector
○ Horn
○ Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, place the ignition in the STOP (OFF)
position to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system. If there are no
fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices
(e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by
following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
R
eset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to
ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the
system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure (Hybrid Models)
After an event occurs requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the system
is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle System”
message will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
The vehicle is not drivable in this state.
In order to reset the high voltage battery and engine,
the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
immediately to be inspected and have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the hazard flashers,
interior lights, power door locks, or the HVAC blower
motor, the ignition switch must be changed from START
or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
242 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
● Modif
ications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, includ-
ing adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the
front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
● It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
● Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
any air bag system service. If your seat, including
your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosen-ing/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufact-urer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag
system for per-sons
with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR
in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According
to crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
SAFETY 243
6
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
● For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1-888-327-4236.
● Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information: https://tc.canada.ca/en/
road-transportation/child-car-seat-safety
NOTE:
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can
be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing
or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
● Ne
ver place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years
or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
244 SAFETY
● Ne
ver install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing
child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle
is not designed to manage the crash forces of this
type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may
not function as it was designed by the car seat
manufacturer, and your child may be more severely
injured as a result.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride
forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child
seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-
facing direction are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or
height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat
with a harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-
positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit
properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or
rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before
adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the
vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
● When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or
seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat
belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching
can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position
the seat belt on the child correctly.
SAFETY 245
6
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may
result in serious injury or death. A child must always
wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child
Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether An-
chor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child Re-
straint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg)
X
246 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH syst
em
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install
the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
R
estraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Seven Passenger Quad Seat LATCH
Positions (Includes (Stow ‘n Go)
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY 247
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint? 65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows con-
tact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center
head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be re-
moved if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint. 2nd row Quad and Stow 'n Go head restraints
are not removable. The 3rd r
ow center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable
page 61.
248 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is to be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that
are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the
anchorage symbols on the seatback. They
are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the seatback
and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row
Anchorages Shown) Seven Passenger
Quad and Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row
Anchorages Shown) Eight Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages
Shown) Seven Passenger Bench Seating
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind all second row seating positions. The
third row has a te
ther anchor on the 40%
seat for the right outboard position and in
the center of the 60% seat for either the center or
left outboard seating position. All tether anchorages are
located on the back of the seat, near the floor.
SAFETY 249
6
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second
Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Seven
Passenger Quad and Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Second
Row Eight Passenger Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages (Third
Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector to
attach to the low
er anchorage and a way to tighten
the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LA
TCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third
row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the
right outboard position behind the front passenger (1).
Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating
position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not
have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint
using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position
in your vehicle.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard
position, do not use that outboard position. If a child
seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH
anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
250 SAFET
Y
WARNING!
● Use anchorages C and D t
o install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your v
ehicle.
● Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please see
page 247 for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retract
or (ALR) seat belt, stow the
seat belt, following the instructions below. See
page 251 to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat
can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for
the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3. A
ttach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See
page 255 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to secure
child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if
they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the
LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route
the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and
then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
● Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-
f
itted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses,
or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
● Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
SAFETY 251
6
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion
of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it
is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor
can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked,
the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description for
additional information on ALR
page 232.
Please see the table below and the following sections
for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Seven Passenger Bench Seat
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Seven Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Eight Passenger Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
252 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the recom-
mended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat? Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed?
Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center
head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be re-
moved if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint. 2nd row Quad and Stow 'n Go head restraints
are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is
removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable
page 61.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes
with the installation of the child restraint, the head
restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright
position when the seat is t
o be used by an occupant
who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with
the head restraint in its lowered position could result
in serious injury or death in a collision.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
SAFETY 253
6
WARNING!
● Im
proper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
● Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined,
you may recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearw
ard in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step
5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while you
push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage,
connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See
page 255 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9.
Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4
mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a
park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to
occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight
installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over
the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and
install the car seat following the steps above. When the
car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch
plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch
the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features
of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature.
Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as
described in the steps above or mo
ve the car seat to a
different seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
254 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat, including
the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach
the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the
tether anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See
page 247 for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
Second Row Tether Attachment
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat
forwar
d to provide better access to the tether
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
Top Tether Anchorage
Locations 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations
2nd Row Eight Passenger
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Second Row Seven Passenger Quad
and Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path f
or the strap between the anchor and
the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with
adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head
restraint, and where possible, route the tether
strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint
and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
SAFETY 255
6
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
WARNING!
● An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead
to increased head motion and possible injury to
the child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint
top tether strap.
● If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the te
ther strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60%
seat in the third row may be used by either the left
outboard or the center seating position. Only tether one
child restraint to the te
ther anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the 60% third
row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap betw
een the anchor and the
child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center
head restraint and route the tether strap around
the inboard (left) side of the head restraint support
posts, as shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than one
child restraint t
o the tether anchorage on the 60%
seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for
one child restraint at a time.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
● Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
● It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
(Continued)
256 SAFETY
WARNING!
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
TRANSPOR
TING PETS
Air Bags deplo
ying in the fr
ont seat could harm y
our
pe
t. An unrestrained pe
t will be thro
wn about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
P
e
ts should be restrained in the rear seat (if eq
uipped)
in pe
t harnesses or pe
t carriers that are secured b
y
seat belts.
C
ONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be ensured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer to
“Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity”
page 127.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
(Continued)
WARNING!
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do no
t disassemble or modify
the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first placed in the
ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until
the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
page 225.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the
floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control.
To pre
vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
● ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or
turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
(Continued)
SAFETY 257
6
WARNING!
● AL
WAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat
on top of an existing floor mat.
● ONL
Y install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor
mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA US LLC
approved floor mat for the specific make, model,
and year of your vehicle.
● ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with
the vehicle properly parked with the engine off,
fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference.
If your floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the
floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
● ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
● ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle
is moving. Objects can become trapped under
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could
cause a loss of vehicle control.
● NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change
the position of the floor mat and may cause
(Continued)
WARNING!
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
● If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to
the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
● It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using the
floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessiv
e tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights
and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check
turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the
instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspect
ed, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
● Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
● If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
● If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
258 SAFETY
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer
inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent
body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions provided to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
● Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such
as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
● Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
(Continued)
WARNING!
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any
abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until
repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
● When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
SAFETY 259
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time
t
o turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when
your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard
warning for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With e
xtended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS AND ASSIST MIRROR — IF E
QUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and
ASSIST button.
SOS And ASSIST Mirror
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
r
oad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
(Continued)
WARNING!
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber
page 343.
● The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network, which comes as a built-in function.
Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your
Chrysler Connect™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to an SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the SOS and ASSIST
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green
once a connection to an SOS operator has been
made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to an SOS operator:
● Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call
● The vehicle brand
● The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the r
oad. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
f
eatures and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
● Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator,
the SOS operator may be able to open a
v
oice connection with the vehicle to determine
if additional assistance is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operat
or until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and provide
them with important vehicle information and GPS
coordinates.
WARNING!
● If an
yone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediat
ely and move to a safe
location.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable network
and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
● The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency call.
(Continued)
WARNING!
To avoid interference that can cause the SOS
Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio,
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
● Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may
not answer or respond t
o SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of
the following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
● The Rearview Mirror light located between the SOS
and ASSIST buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
● The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
● An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
7
WARNING!
● Ignoring the R
earview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, hav
e an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
● The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the system
is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the
Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following fact
ors:
● The ignition is in the OFF position
● The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
● The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
● The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable
or obstructed
● Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
● Operator error by the SOS operator
● LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
● Weather
● Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features
and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
NOTE:
● Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
● Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS
signal is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that
your vehicle’s air bags deploy. Please refer to your
provided radio supplement for complete information.
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
● Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need
a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will
be connected to a representative for assistance.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle is being
driven and its location. Additional fees may apply for
roadside assistance.
● Chrysler Connect™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for Chrysler Connect™.
● Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
● Uconnect Customer Care – Total support for Radio,
Phone and NAV issues.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spra
y any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
● Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
(Continued)
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
WARNING!
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
● Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
● The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used
to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice
or slipper
y areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
7
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped)
are stowed behind an access panel on the left hand
side of the vehicle.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut
that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently
remove it from the storage area. Remove wrench
from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
count
er
clockwise t
o collapse from st
orage area
that is locat
ed behind the tire.
Jack Location
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
pre
vent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
● Always park on a firm, level surface as f
ar from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
● Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
● Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
● Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
(Continued)
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
● Do no
t get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
● Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
● If wor
king on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations o
ther than those indicat
ed in the Jacking
Instructions f
or this v
ehicle.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each
side of the vehicle body. These locations are on
the sill flange of the vehicle body.
NO
TE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper
jacking locations.
Jack Locations
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The v
ehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to ge
t under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Front Lifting Point
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
7
Front Jack Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations o
ther than those indicated.
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly engaged
in the described location. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand.
Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel
off the hub.
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
mak
e the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the v
alve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating
the inflatable spare after the tire has been
mounted to the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the
hub by tight
ening the nuts with the wrench. After
inflation, once the vehicle is lowered you will have
a second opportunity to “torque” the lug nuts
page 332.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi
(4.2 Bar) using the Por
table Air Compressor
page 268 or Tire Service Kit if equipped
page
269.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has
reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has
been removed from the tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice
page 332. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or har
d stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and
the spare tire in the places provided. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover
assembly in the rear cargo area. Do no
t st
o
w the
deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location.
Ha
v
e the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as
soon as possible.
1
3.
St
o
w the jack back in the st
o
w
age compartment
and place the access panel back. The stud of
the storage area must be threaded through the
lower part of the jack. Then turn the Jack Screw
clockwise to secure it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
Storing The Jack
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
7
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels
with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the
mounting studs which are on each side of the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive f
orce to install the
cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush
onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will
have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is
lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel
under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause
vibration, and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. Details for proper wheel lug nut torque
page 332. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are
properly seated against the wheel.
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located
in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the
inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare
Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the
storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in the
Jacking Instructions within this section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is locat
ed near
the ground, and then screw the air hose of the
Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem.
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it
the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before turning
ON the Portable Air Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire pressure
indicated on the Tire and Loading information label
located on the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in
the Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label sticker
from the Portable Air Compressor and
place it on the center of the steering
wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam
tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam
tray in the cargo area.
WARNING!
● Do no
t lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by
the hose.
● Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in
the provided place.
● The metal end fitting from Pow
er Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
● Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open
flames or heat source.
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location.
1. Return the Jack.
2.
Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit
or Portable Air Compressor
page 268 and
push the deflation button to do this step. See
the Portable Air Compressor in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare tire will
return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original
stowage location and position facing outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the strap.
7. Install access panel door.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Scan this QR code to learn more
about the Tire Service Kit.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed
from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside
temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This
kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
Remove the rear panel to access the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Access Panel Location — If Equipped
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
7
Tire Service Kit
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, Tire Service Kit
storage locations may vary.
Tire Service Kit Location — If Equipped
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap, and is
stored under the load floor within the second row.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
● Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position for air pump operation
only.
● Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn
to this position to inject the Tire Service
Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.
● Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once
to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn
Off the Tire Service Kit.
● Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the
air pressure in the tire if it becomes
overinflated.
● Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior
to the expiration date (printed at the lower right
hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system. See the Sealant Bottle
Replacement in this section for further information.
● The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original
equipment vehicle dealer.
● When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be
peeled off and properly discarded.
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
● For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
● The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal
punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
● The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
● Y
ou can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on
the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls,
rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob
is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
● Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
● Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following cir
cumstances:
○ If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
○ If the tire has any sidewall damage.
○ If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING!
○ If the tire has an
y damage from driving on a flat
tire.
○ If the wheel has any damage.
○ If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
● Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
● A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or har
d stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
● Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if
inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin.
It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush
immediately with plenty of water if there is any
contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
● Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex.
In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a
physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out
of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty
of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a
physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whene
ver You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power
outlet.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
7
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning
the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant
Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the vehicle is running before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until
sealant is no longer flowing through
hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8
bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant
Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Sealant
Bottle is empty. Continue to operate
the pump and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on the Tire And
Loading Information Label located in the driver-
side door opening. Check the tire pressure by
looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within 15 minutes:
● The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the
Tire Service Kit and place sticker on
the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the
end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in
the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8
km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50
mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced.
Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal t
o you, your passengers, and
others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
possible at an authorized dealer.
After Driving:
● Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
● Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into
the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this
position before proceeding.
● Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
● Apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the
plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power
outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting
at the end of the hose onto the valve
stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on
the Tire And Loading Information Label
located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area
in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or
tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
7
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
● For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
● Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized ser
vice centers.
JUMP STARTING (GAS MODELS)
If y
our vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable batt
ery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor
,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START (GAS
MODELS)
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compar
tment.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal jew
elry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Battery Location
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and place the ignition
to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
set the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE (GAS MODELS)
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post near
the windshield cowl (exposed metallic/unpainted
post of the discharge vehicle).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the vehicle starts, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery and reinstall
the protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The rear 12 Volt DC outlet is not controlled by
the vehicle’s ignition (the outlet provides power
even when the ignition is OFF). Accessories (i.e.,
cellular devices, ect.) plugged into the rear 12 Volt
power outlet ma
y draw sufficient power, even when
they are OFF (in standby mode), to discharge the
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. If the device is allowed
to continue drawing power, eventually the vehicle’s
12 Volt battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
7
JUMP STARTING (HYBRID MODELS)
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery
booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly so please follow the procedures in this
section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
The vehicle requires its 12 Volt battery power to turn-
on the vehicle's high voltage battery. The high voltage
battery is used to charge the 12 Volt battery, provide
electric vehicle operation, and to start the vehicle's gas
engine. If the 12 Volt battery has been discharged,
the vehicle can be jump started using a set of jumper
cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been
discharged, it will need to be recharged to a minimum
operating State Of Charge (SOC) before the vehicle can
be started:
● If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or Level
2 charger where it is currently parked, the vehicle
will still require a jump start to allow the vehicle to
begin the battery charging process. Once the vehicle
charging has begun (indicated by the charge status
indicator on top of the vehicle's instrument panel),
the jumper cables can be removed from the vehicle
jump posts.
● If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle can be moved by connecting 12 Volt power
to the vehicle's jump posts and then shifting the
transmission from PARK (P) into NEUTRAL (N). Power
provided by the jumper cables will also allow the
Electric Park Brake to be released. Carefully move
the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge location.
While the vehicle is being moved, the external 12
Volt power must remain connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that
control of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure that
vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional movement
during and after moving the vehicle. If the external
12 Volt power becomes disconnected from the vehicle
jump posts or there is an interruption of the 12
Volt power while moving the vehicle, the vehicle's
transmission may engage PARK. Do not allow the
jumper cables to come in contact with each other or
to the vehicle, this will result in a short.
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift the
transmission back to PARK, apply the Electric Park
Brake, and start the high voltage battery charging. Once
the vehicle has been secured against unintentional
movement and high voltage battery charging has been
initiated, the jumper cables can be removed from the
vehicle jump posts.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so
please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START (HYBRID
MODELS)
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driv
er’s
side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
● T
ake care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime
the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
● Remove any metal je
welry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
● Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positiv
e battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol
on or around the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and place the ignition
to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over
the positive (+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach,
set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is
OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE (HYBRID
MODELS)
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post near
the windshield cowl (exposed metallic/unpainted
post of the discharge vehicle).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
cycle the ignition to ON/RUN in the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. After a couple minutes (depending on the level
of 12 Volt battery discharge), attempt to start
the vehicle. Once the vehicle starts, follow the
disconnecting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery and reinstall
the protective cap.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
7
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The rear 12 Volt DC outlet is not controlled by
the vehicle’s ignition (the outlet provides power
even when the ignition is OFF). Accessories (i.e.,
cellular devices, ect.) plugged into the rear 12 Volt
power outlet may draw sufficient power, even when
they are OFF (in standby mode), to discharge the
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. If the device is allowed
to continue drawing power, eventually the vehicle’s
12 Volt battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF
EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
a capless fuel system. If emergency refueling is
necessary, use an approved gas can and insert the
refueling funnel into the fuel filler pipe opening. Take
care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid
spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel
door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door by pushing at the rear center edge to unlatch.
Refueling Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel
is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrie
ve funnel from the rear storage area.
Fuel Funnel Location
2. Insert funnel into the fuel filler pipe opening.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overf
illing, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
● Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
● Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
(Continued)
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
● A f
ire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could
be burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
● T
emperature gauge is at HOT (H)
● Strong smell of coolant
● White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
● Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling syst
em pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to
the HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
● On highways — slow down.
● In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the
brakes.
● Turn off the Air Conditioner (A/C). The A/C system
adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning
the A/C off can help remove this heat.
● Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately
, and call for
service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your
foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain
control of the vehicle before activating the Manual
Park Release. If possible, you should apply the
parking brake. A
ctivating the Manual Park Release
will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
or properly connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could
(Continued)
WARNING!
lead to serious injury or death for those in or around
the vehicle.
To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission
will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seat
ed in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove
the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to
the lower left of the steering column.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
7
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether
strap out as far as it will go, then release it.
The transmission should now be in NEUTRAL (N),
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connect
ed to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its
original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
reinstall the access co
ver. If the access cover
cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can oft
en be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
● Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the
brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
● Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
page 214. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button
again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin
(Continued)
WARNING!
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone
near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
● Racing the engine or spinning the wheels ma
y
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after ever
y
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
● When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
● Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Towing
Condition
Wheels
OFF The
Ground
FWD MOD-
ELS
AWD MOD-
ELS
Flat Tow NONE
NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT AL-
LOWED
Wheel Lift
Or Dolly
Tow
Front
ACCEPTA-
BLE METH-
OD
NOT AL-
LOWED
Rear
NOT AL-
LOWED
NOT AL-
LOWED
Flatbed ALL
BEST
METHOD
BEST
METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and
other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety
chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local
laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
● You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels
are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric
Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
● Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the EPB is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed eq
uipment is not available, this vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using
a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located
on the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
● Ensure that the t
owing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attachment
points.
● This recovery tow feature should be used by a
trained professional only.
● Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
● Is t
o be used by a professional ONLY.
● Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
● Is NOT to be used to reco
ver secondary vehicle.
● Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
● Be applied at constant speed.
● Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
● Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
7
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver's
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle
page 279.
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
● When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle ma
y result
from improper towing.
● Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
● Towing this v
ehicle using any other method can
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage.
● Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limit
ed Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes
effect in the ev
ent of an impact. Detailed information
can be found on
page 242.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed under certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle. Detailed information can be found on
page 243.
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This means
that service is required for your vehicle. Operating
conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer towing,
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
● Check engine oil level.
● Check windshield washer fluid level.
● Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
● Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
● Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Change oil and f
ilter.
● Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
● Inspect 12 Volt battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
● Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
● Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
● Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
● Inspect exhaust system.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
8
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If
a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than an authorized dealer page 112.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System
● Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if
necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if
necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace spark plugs
1
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt X
Flush and replace the engine, power electronics, and battery coolant
at 1
0 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
2
X X
Replace PCV valve X
WARNING!
● Y
ou can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you ha
ve any doubt about your ability to perform
(Continued)
WARNING!
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
● Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
(Continued)
WARNING!
and affect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
1
The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
2
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant pr
operly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal damage. If any coolant needs to be added
to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
8
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter 8 — Battery
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3.6L ENGINE — HYBRID
1 — Battery Coolant Reservoir
1
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir
1
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 10 — Engine Air Cleaner, Filter
1
See an authorized dealer for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
8
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil le
vel is about five minutes after
a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
● Crosshatched zone.
● Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
● Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end
of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
● Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low
end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
y
our engine.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reser
voir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never hav
e to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
WARNING!
● Batt
ery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not
lean o
ver a battery when attaching clamps. If
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area
immediately with large amounts of water
page 274.
● Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster source
with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow
cable clamps to touch each other.
● Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
● It is essential when replacing the cables on the
batt
ery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached
to the negative post. Battery posts are marked
positive (+) and negative (-) and are identif
ied on
the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on
the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
● If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery.
Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting
voltage.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine com
par
tment with a high pressure
w
asher is not recommended.
CA
UTION!
Precautions ha
ve been tak
en t
o saf
eguar
d all par
ts
and connections ho
w
e
ver, the pressures generated
by these machines is such that complete protection
against wat
er ingress cannot be guaranteed.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform
all service operations in an expert manner. Service
Manuals are a
vailable which include detailed service
information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids
page 336.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API
trademar
k oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number
s should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection
dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by
supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil
and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to
the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
8
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The q
uality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used. If Mopar® Engine Oil Filters are
unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 283.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.)
can provide a measure of protection in the case
of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal
is necessary f
or repair or maintenance. Make sure
that no one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can
result in serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Do not star
t the engine or have the engine running
while performaning these steps.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Discconnect the vapor hose b
y pushing down on
the clip and pulling outward.
2. Loosen the clamp on the air intake hose.
3. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on the
engine air cleaner, filter cover.
4. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover and pull the
cover forward until the locating tabs are free from
the rear of the filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fastener
2 — Clamp
3 — Vapor Hose
4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
5. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing assembly only if
significant dirt or debris is present before replacing the
engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surf
ace facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly and pushing the cover into the
locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter
cover lid screws or damage may result.
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Tighten the air intake hose clamp.
5. Reconnect the vapor hose into the housing
assembly.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
WARNING!
● Do no
t attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any time
regar
dless of ignition mode. You could be injured
by the moving fan blades.
● You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks
that run across the ribbed surface of a belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along
a rib (not across) are not normal. An
y belt with cracks
running along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the
belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or
severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
● Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
● Rib or belt wear
● Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
● Belt slips
● Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
● Belt brok
en
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
● Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use
of special t
ools; we recommend having your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, y
our air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This service
should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a
performance test. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
WARNING!
● Use only refrigerants and com
pressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unappro
ved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring
costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information
located online, for further warranty information.
● The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
8
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–
1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-
friendly substance with a low global-w
arming potential.
It is recommended that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving
extra slack on the glove compartment tension
tether. Detach the glove compartment tension
t
ether by sliding the black tension tether clip down,
and popping it out of the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
either side of the glove compartment door. To
release them, push inward on each travel stop,
and pull the glove compartment door down until
the travel stops pass clear of their hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover (if equipped).
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment
snap, and detach it from the rest of the snap.
There is a small space on the side of each snap
to use for separating the lid from the snap. Once
detached, remove the rest of the snap completely
from the compartment cov
er (if equipped).
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment
cover to gain access to the fresh air inlet.
Fresh Air Inlet
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the
retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then
pulling the filter cover out to expose the cabin air
filter. Remove the air filt
er by pulling it straight out
of the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more oft
en.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover,
making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured
into their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and
reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap
lids until fully attached.
11
. Push the glove compartment door to the
near closed position to reengage the glove
compar
tment travel stops. Finally, pull the glove
compartment tension tether clip down and slide
it back into the slot on the side of the glove
compartment door.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items
as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers,
liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges,
should be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based
grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always
use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt
or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline,
etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
● Wear or uneven edges
● Foreign material
● Hardening or cracking
● Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
8
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Scan this QR code to learn more
about Wiper Blade Removal/Installa-
tion.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass
may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up
position.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and
while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide
the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release
Tab In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper
blade from the wiper arm with the other hand
(move the wiper blade toward the right side of the
vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper
arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip
of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open
and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away
from the windshield.
3. Inser
t the hook on the tip of the arm through the
opening in the wiper blade under the release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush
against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch
engagement will be accompanied by an audible
click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the
glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised of
f the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest
to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left
hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper
blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far
enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivo
t pin from
the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade,
move the wiper blade upward and away from the
wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the
glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off
of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm canno
t be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of
the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
8
blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into
place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle
is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil changes.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
● Exhaust gases can injure or kill. The
y contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you
page 256.
● A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
o
ver materials that can burn, such as grass or
leaves, and those items can come into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate
your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system
can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
● The catalytic con
verter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy
the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions
control device and may seriously reduce engine
per
formance and cause serious damage to the
engine.
● Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle
serviced promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause
the converter to overheat, resulting in possible
damage to the converter and vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it is
important t
o keep the engine properly tuned to ensure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs,
stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to
cool. Service, including a tune-up to the manufacturer
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
● Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission
is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
● Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing
the vehicle.
● Do not idle the engine with any ignition com
ponents
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
WARNING!
● You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling syst
em
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
● Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised.
The fan starts automatically and may start at any
time, whether the engine is running or not.
● When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition is
in the ON mode.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 283.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information
page 336.
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of
your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When
adding engine coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
● Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
● It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system, please contact
an authorized dealer.
● Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended
and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and
OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an
authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coo-
lant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
8
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do no
t open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows
no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may
be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
COOLING SYSTEM — HYBRID
WARNING!
● T
urn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
● You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling system
(Continued)
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
● Do not put your hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
near the radiator cooling fan. The fan may start at
any time, whether the ignition is on or off.
Cooling Fan Warning Label
This vehicle is equipped with an electric cooling fan
mounted behind the radiator that starts automatically,
and may start at any time. Your vehicle may de
termine
the fan needs to start and to run if vehicle coolant is
too hot, or if the ambient air temperature is too high.
Even after the vehicle is turned off, the fan may start
without warning and run for several minutes. Be aware
of this if you are working in the engine compartment.
Always keep fingers and tools away from the fan blades.
The radiator fan and surrounding components must be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) e
very 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
Organic Additive Technology (O
AT) coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front
of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water
from a garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
NOTE:
If the engine coolant is changed for low temperature
capability, you must also change the coolant for the
Electric/Battery systems
page 299.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator.
Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE
THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine or electrical system
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the
system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 283.
Electric/Battery Coolant System
These coolant systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the coolant level is below what is
specified on the reservoir, contact an authorized dealer
f
or service.
These systems require the use of high purity water,
such as deionized, or distilled water, when mixing the
water and coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of
lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion
protection in the cooling systems. If the coolant level
of the battery coolant system is low, the Hybrid Electric
Vehicle System Service Light will be illuminated on the
instrument cluster.
Selection Of Coolant
NOTE:
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT
engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
8
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use
of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
● Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant
is needed to be added to the system please contact
an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This coolant
(antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant that meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032. When adding coolant:
● We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
● Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and deionized, or
distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
e
xceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated.
CAUTION!
Use only high purity water such as deionized, or
distilled water when mixing the water/ coolant
(antifreeze) solution for the engine, battery or high
voltage electronics cooling systems. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion
protection in the engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to
maintain the proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the area
where the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
● Mixing coolant types is not recommended and can
result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, if the proper
OAT coolant is not available, add only water to
the cooling system, then have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming
to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Under no
circumstances should HOAT coolant be added to the
cooling system.
● Low pressure expansion bottles for power electronics
and battery cooling require a special tool for
removing the cap from the expansion bottle. For
the battery coolant bottle, it is important to not add
coolant if level is low. The vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer for proper servicing of the
battery coolant loop if this should occur.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank (if eq
uipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
WARNING!
● Do no
t open a hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine
is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build-up in the cooling syst
em. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
● Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To pre
vent ingestion by
animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground, clean up any ground spills
immediately. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately.
300 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine off and cold, the le
vel of the
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or
high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of the engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
● Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
● Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
● If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
● Maintain coolant concentration at a minimum of
50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
deionized, or distilled water.
● Use only high purity water such as deionized,
or distilled water when mixing the water/coolant
solution for the engine, battery or high voltage
electronics cooling systems. The use of lower quality
water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the cooling system.
● Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
● Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
● Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
● The coolant freeze point in the battery and power
electronics loop should be checked by an authorized
dealer as a special tool is required to remove the cap
from those expansion bottles.
● Electric/Battery coolant system must be serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the coolant level is
below what is specified on the reservoir, contact an
authorized dealer for service. These systems require
the use of high purity water such as deionized, or
distilled water when mixing the water and coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the cooling
syst
ems.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system com
ponents should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
page 283.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You w
ould not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or immediately
if the Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessar
y, add fluid to bring
the fluid level up to the requirements described on
the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a
checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
page 337.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
8
WARNING!
● Use only manuf
acturer recommended brake
fluid
page 337. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper type of
brak
e fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
● To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
● Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
● Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its per
formance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as
the
y may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore
the transmission has no dipstick
. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using special
service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause
severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filt
er changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified transmission
fluid
page 337. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder
page 33
7.
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
● When replacing a blo
wn fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any
o
ther material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper
fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
● Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
● If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result
in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blo
wn fuse)
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit
breakers and relays. A label that identifies each
component is printed on the inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure
engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located
at each side of the PDC cover, avoid using screwdrivers
or any other tool to remove the cover, since they may
apply excessive force and result in a broken/damaged
part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two
locks.
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
NOTE:
The function and amperage of the following fuses are
different, depending on vehicle trim level and content.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
8
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F06 – – Not Populated
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil / Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Populated
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Control *
F10 – – Not Populated
F11 – – Not Populated
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (S) *
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC / Power Locks
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC / EXT LIGHTS
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Populated
F23 – – Not Populated
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25 – 10 Amp Red
Hands-Free Dr Mod / Active Grille Shut-
ter / Pwr Mirror / VRM
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28 – 10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Port / USB+(IP) / Video USB
Port / Overhead DVD Player(Aftermarket)
F29 – – Not Populated
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB / Power Lumbar *
F31 – – Not Populated
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof *
F36 – – Not Populated
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC / Exterior Lights
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Populated
F41 – – Not Populated
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC / Interior Lights
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Populated
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Populated
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55 – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless Ignition
System (KIN) / ESL / DVD
F56 – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control Module /
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) /
Electronic Steering Lock (ESL) / ESP /
ESC
F57 – – Not Populated
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drive Train Control Mod / Power Transfer
Unit *
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo Pwr Outlet
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Populated
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module (HALF) /
Parktronics System (PTS)/Drivers Assist
System Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Populated
F69 – – Not Populated
F70 – – Not Populated
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror *
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights*
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR Center Stack
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / Center Display / Telematics
F77 – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment / Media HUB /
USB(S) / Rain Sensor / Sunroof / RR View
Mirror/ Overhead DVD Player / INT Moni-
toring Camera
F78 – 15 Amp Blue TCM (ZF) / E-Shifter / Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / SCCM/ EPB SW
F80 – – Not Populated
F81 – – Not Populated
F82 – – Not Populated
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control MOD *
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Populated
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F87 – – Not Populated
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Populated
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering
Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Populated
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC/RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F97 – 10 Amp Red Airbag
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Elect Brake Module *
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F100 – 10 Amp Red
Headlamp Level / RR Camera / Blind-
spot / Humidity SNSR / In Car Temp
SNSR / Headlamp SW *
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes + RR
PWR Window Lockout
30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For
replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Turn Signal Lamp WY21W / 7440NA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs — Halogen
Interior Bulbs — Halogen
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part
Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this
section includes bulb description and replacement part
numbers.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For
replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
into the housing, and rotate the front turn signal
lamp socket clockwise to lock it in place.
FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel
liner and carefully peel back liner for access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to remo
ve it
from the lamp assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp
socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp
assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise to
lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install
the three f
asteners.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cov
er aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification
Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire
Pressures, and Tire Loading.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
8
Replacing Exterior Bulbs FRONT TURN
SIGNAL LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
NOTE:
● P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
● European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard
have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning
with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from
this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
● LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for LT-
Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
● Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
● High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = P
assenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
● Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
● "R" means radial construction, or
● "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diame
ter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
● A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
● A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
● The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, r
oad conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identif
ication symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
● XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
● LL = Light load tire or
● C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specif
ied pressure
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
8
EXAMPLE:
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard
side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
● This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
● 01 means the year 2001
● Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to hav
e one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The
maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to
the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
8
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire And Loading
Information Placard in this manual page 170.
NOTE:
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing,
page 170.
(1) Locate the statement “The
combined weight ofoccupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
● If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate
total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
● For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
318 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and lugg-
age load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your
trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
● Safety
● Fuel Economy
● Tread Wear
● Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
WARNING!
● Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
8
WARNING!
● U
nderinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
● Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
● Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
v
ehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
● Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
● Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift
to the right or left.
● Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
● Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
● Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side
door.
At least once a month:
● Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
● Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
alw
ays reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is def
ined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded int
o the tire
side
w
all.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary
with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21
kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C)
for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal
pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires
could cause them to fail. You could have a serious
collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
● The tire has not been driven on when flat.
● The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
● The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6
mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it
is no
t designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of
inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred
to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs
when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat
mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
When a Run Flat tire is changed after being driven in
the Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please
replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be
reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle
on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do
not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
(Continued)
WARNING!
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires should
be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When
the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced
page 322.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
8
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
● Driving style.
● Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven w
ear patterns to develop across
the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will
reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
● Distance driven.
● Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
y
ears, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Pr
otect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
using tires equiv
alent to the originals in size, quality
and performance when replacement is needed
page 321. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
page 314.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely
affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
● Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and
wheels may change suspension dimensions and
performance characteristics, resulting in changes
(Continued)
WARNING!
to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress
to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
● Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
● Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Eq
uipped
All season tires pr
o
vide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer
, A
utumn, and Winter). T
raction le
v
els ma
y v
ar
y
be
tw
een different all season tires. All season tires can
be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation
on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
322 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow
or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires,
be a
ware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C)
or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation
or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use
of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires
can be identified by a mountain/snowflake
symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need
snow tires, select tires equiv
alent in size and type to
the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75
mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120
km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized
tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states
prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
page 269.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
a compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
page
176.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped
Tire And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function t
o the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
com
pact spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall
of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with
the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare
tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire
and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicator
s, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
8
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicator
s, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limit
ed tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on
the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the
driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like
the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of
your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use
spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel.
Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed
on your Tire And Loading Information Placard locat
ed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
(Continued)
WARNING!
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall
it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with
the same soap solution recommended for the body of
the vehicle and remember to alwa
ys wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt
ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or
sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage
the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the wheel's
protective finish. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the
tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible
spare tire.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar®
Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their
equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to
remove the water droplets from the brake components.
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors
and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the follo
wing
snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
● Snow traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the snow traction device
manufacturer.
● No other tire sizes are recommended for use with
the snow traction device.
● Please follow the table for the recommended tire
size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
T
rim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Touring
T
ouring L
Front
235/65R17
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited
Pinnacle
235/60R18
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
8
FWD Hybrid
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Touring L
Limited
Front
235/65R17
235/60R18
9 mm Cable/Chain
Pinnacle 235/60R18
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (Maximum Projec-
tion Beyond Tire Profile Or Equivalent)
Touring L
Front 235/60R18 9 mm Cable/Chain
Limited
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause
unpredictable handling. You could lose control and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
● Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components,
it is important that only traction devices in good
(Continued)
CAUTION!
condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if
noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device before
further use.
● Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8
km). Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
● Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
● Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
● Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use. Always
use the suggested operating speed of the device
manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
● Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they w
ear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all
season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help
to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed
page
283.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not
be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned
by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these
grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate
of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in r
oad
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
These grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
8
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high tem
perature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps
to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
● Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
● Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system
is started again.
STORING THE VEHICLE — HYBRID
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
● Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location with the windows open slightly.
● Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
● Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged.
During storage check battery charge quarterly.
NOTE:
Disconnecting the 12 V
olt battery will prevent the
High Voltage (HV) Battery from accepting a charge
from the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE).
Also, the vehicle will not condition the HV Battery
(if needed and connected to a powered EVSE). If
the HV Battery is not able to condition itself and it
becomes cold enough (or hot enough), the vehicle
will not start until the HV Battery’s cell temperatures
are between -22°F (-30°C) and 122°F (50°C).
● If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge every
30 days.
● Whenever you leave the vehicle stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the vehicle for approximately five
minutes, with the air conditioning system on and
high fan speed. This will ensure proper lubrication of
the system, thus minimizing the possibility of
damage to the compressor when the vehicle is put
back into operation.
● Plug in the vehicle when not using it whenever
possible.
NOTE:
The hybrid has a feature of periodic wake-up that
occurs every 21 days. This feature charges the 12 Volt
battery from the high voltage battery. This will happen
as long as the high voltage battery remains above the
minimum state of charge
page 132.
328 SER
VICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the driver’s
door. When reconnecting the positive and negative
terminals to the battery be sure the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your
vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and
other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on
paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
● Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
● Stone and gravel impact.
● Insects, tree sap and tar.
● Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
● Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is eq
uipped with plastic headlights and
fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth.
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the
lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
● Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a
mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely
with water.
● If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super
Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to get rid of any
deposits.
● Use a high q
uality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions t
o not
scratch the paint.
● Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
● Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
● Use of power washers exceeding 1
,200 psi (8,274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
Special Care
● If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month.
● It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
● If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
● If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
8
possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the
responsibility of the owner.
● If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
● If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
● Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon
as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint
to match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Man
y are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do no
t remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the
belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do
not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or
if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
● Direct contact of air freshener
s, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated sur
faces of the interior
may cause permanent damage. Wipe away
immediately
.
● Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaner
s. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles
of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather
upholstery and should be removed promptly with a
damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with
a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show
any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more
so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar®
total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean
the leather seats as needed.
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or ketone-
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive
type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defr
osters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through
the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic syst
ems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function. However, there will be some loss of overall
braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal
travel during application, greater pedal force required
to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
W
arning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However
, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using
a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided
(hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb (135
N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
332 TECHNICAL SPECIFICA
TIONS
Torque Patterns
Torque Pattern
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque
to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly
tightened.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the
engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the
engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see
a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience
these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide optimum
fuel economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded regular gasoline
having a posted octane number of 87 as specified
by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxy
genates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed the
applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light t
o illuminate. Please observe pump
labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel
contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing
methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 333
9
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
VEHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-1
5). Use of
gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
● Undesirable lean conditions
● OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
● Poor engine performance
● Poor cold start and cold drivability
● Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP)
may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and
fuel system components. Problems that result from
running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE
TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN GASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that
is blended into some gasolines to increase octane.
Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance
adv
antage beyond gasoline of the same octane
number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT
reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in
your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline ma
y not be
indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should
ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are recommended.
Using gasolines that have these additives will help
improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain
vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When available, the usage
of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended
for gum and varnish removal may contain active
solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel
system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
● The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
la
w. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine
performance and damage the emissions control
system.
● An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic con
verter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
● The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products contain
high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives
is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
334 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 gal 71 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine 15 qt 14.2 L
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
FLUID CAPACITIES — HYBRID
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 17 gal 64 L
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 335
9
US Metric
3.6L Engine 17.3 qt 16.4 L
Battery Coolant 4.5 qt 4.3 L
Power Electronics Coolant 3.6 qt 3.4 L
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
NOTE:
Battery Coolant and Power Electronics Coolant reservoir require a special tool to service the coolant system. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the require-
ments of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full
synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trade-
mark
page 289.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
336 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cooling System*
CAUTION!
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) o
ther
than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive T
echnology (OAT) engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
(Continued)
CAUTION!
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need
to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
● Do no
t use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has no
t been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) is not recommended.
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
F
ailure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 337
9
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant, Battery Coolant, Power Electric Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000
km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for
proper corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufac-
turer Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets
the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full
synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trade-
mark.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
● Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) o
ther
than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
is different and should not be mixed with
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need
to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
● Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
(Continued)
CAUTION!
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
● This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) is not recommended.
338 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — ELECTRIC VEHICLE (EV)
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — HYBRID
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS— HYBRID
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your trans-
mission.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. Use
only recommended brake fluids.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 339
9
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let
the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need
a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements
when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you
are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or
owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if
you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable
to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's
Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
● Owner's name and address
● Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
office)
● Authorized dealer name
● Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
● Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com (USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles
on the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated
from the start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as
set
forth in your Warranty Information book.
3
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out
of gas/fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or
towing as a result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-
free: USA: 1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869.
Provide your name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
required for covered services, license plate number, and
your location, including the telephone number from
3
Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc., 400 River's Edge Drive, Medford, MA 021
55, except in AK, CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services are
provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., 275 East Hillcrest Drive, Suite 165, Thousand Oaks, CA 91360.
340 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch
a service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare
tire (if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s
Manual. This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home.
We will dispatch a service provider to deliver a small
amount of fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you
to a nearby station. This service is limited to two
occurrences in a 12-month period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen
locks are keeping you from getting on your way, help
is just a phone call away. This service is limited to
providing access to the vehicle’s seating area. It does
not cover the cost of replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance
will dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle
to the closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or
Ram dealer. If you choose to go to another dealer, you
will be responsible for the cost of the extra distance.
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French
MEXICO
Customer Relations Office
A
v. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, CDMX
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC Customer Service
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 341
10
which you are calling. Briefly describe the nature of
the problem and answer a few simple questions. You
will be given the name of the service provider and
an estimated time of arrival. If you feel you are in an
unsafe situation, please let us know. With your consent,
we will contact local police or safety authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you
may submit your original receipts from the licensed
towing or service facility, for services rendered within
30 days of the occurrence. Be sure to include your
VIN, odometer mileage at the time of service, and
current mailing address. We will process the claim
based on vehicle and service eligibility. If eligible, we
will reimburse you for the reasonable amount actually
paid, based on the usual and customary charges for
that service in the area where they were provided. FCA
US LLC’s determination relating to reimbursement is
final. Correspondence should be mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at
any time. The Roadside Assistance program is subject
to restrictions and conditions of use, which are
determined solely by FCA US LLC.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING
OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA
US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has
access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC
by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service
offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users,
dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to
connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have pur
chased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by
FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond
your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar®
Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within
three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call FCA US
LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922.
For Canadian residents, you may have purchased
additional coverage with an extended service contract.
FCA Canada Inc. stands fully behind its service
contracts. Be sure that the one you buy is a genuine
Canada Inc. service contract. We are not responsible
for other companies’ contracts. If you purchased a
contract other than a genuine FCA Canada Inc. service
contract and you have a problem, you will have to
contact the administrator of that contract for resolution.
If you have any questions about the service contract,
call the FCA's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
Mopar Vehicle Protection Plans offer valuable
protection against repair costs after your vehicle
warranties have expired. Mopar Vehicle Protection
plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans
authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC
to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle's
warranty.
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract
you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If
you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools,
and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted
with the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for
further information.
In Canada:
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to owners.mopar.ca/en
for further information.
For French, refer to owners.mopar.ca/fr/ for further
information.
Scan this QR code to learn more
about warranty information.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to
keep it operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
WASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
342 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, an authorized dealer
or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect,
you should contact the Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report
a safety defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
ORDERING AND ACCESSING ADDITIONAL
OWNER’S INFORMATION
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
● 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have
changed your address, please provide the following
information and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
● Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
● Vehicle Identification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
● Exact Odometer Reading
● First and Last Name
● Phone Number
● Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
● Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 343
10
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components and is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make
it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly
how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a digital copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca/en
(Canada).
Or visit:
www.techauthority.com to order physical copies of
Owner’s Manuals (US).
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
344 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes ...........................................332
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) .............................................................147
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ................297
Additives, Fuel ..................................................334
Adjust
Down ..............................................................56
Forward ..........................................................56
Rearward .......................................................56
Up ...................................................................56
Air Bag ..............................................................235
Air Bag Operation ....................................... 236
Air Bag Warning Light ........................234, 236
Driver Knee Air Bag .................................... 239
Enhanced Accident Response ..........242, 282
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ....................... 282
Front Air Bag
............................................... 236
If Deployment Occurs ................................. 241
Knee Impact Bolsters .................................239
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 243
Maintenance ...............................................243
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 234
Side Air Bags ...............................................239
Transporting Pets ........................................257
Air Bag Light ...................................120, 234, 257
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ................................................................ 290
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..........................291
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................... 291, 292
Air Conditioner System ....................................291
Air Conditioning Filter ...................... 85, 290, 292
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................... 84
Air Filter ............................................................290
Air Pressure
Tires .............................................................320
Alarm
Arm The System ............................................36
Disarm The System .......................................36
Security Alarm ............................................ 123
All Wheel Drive
Towing ......................................................... 282
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ......................................145
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle ............................................................. 9
Amazon FireTV ........................................203, 207
Amazon FireTV Built-In ....................................203
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 212
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................................. 123
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......... 297, 299, 335
Disposal ............................................. 298, 300
Assist, Hill Start
............................................... 215
Audio Jack .......................................................... 88
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................... 181
Auto Up Power Windows ....................................93
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................................ 64
Automatic Headlights .........................................71
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .............. 84
Automatic Transaxle ........................................138
Automatic Transmission ..................................139
Adding Fluid .............................. 302, 337, 339
Fluid And Filter Change ..............................302
Fluid Change ...............................................302
Fluid Level Check ....................................... 302
Fluid Type .................................. 302, 337, 339
Special Additives ........................................ 302
AutoPark ..................................................129, 133
AUX Cord .............................................................88
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........90
AWD
Towing ......................................................... 282
Axle Lubrication ...................................... 337, 339
B
B-Pillar Location ...............................................317
Back Up Camera ..............................................165
Battery .............................................. 13, 120, 288
Charging ........................................................ 15
Charging System Light ............................... 120
345
11
Jump Starting ..................................... 274, 276
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .....................27
Battery Saver Feature ........................................73
Belts, Seat
........................................................257
Blind Spot Monitoring ......................................217
Body Mechanism Lubrication .........................293
Brake Assist System ........................................213
Brake Control System, Electronic ................... 213
Brake Fluid ..............................................337–339
Brake System ..........................................301, 332
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................................... 332
Fluid Check ............................... 301, 337, 339
Master Cylinder ...........................................301
Parking ........................................................ 136
Warning Light ..............................................120
Brake/Transmission Interlock ........................ 139
Brightness, Interior Lights .................................73
Bulb Replacement .................................. 312, 313
Bulbs, Light .................................... 258, 312, 313
C
Camera .............................................................165
Camera, Rear ...................................................165
Capacities, Fluid .............................................. 335
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..............................................................168
Oil (Engine) ..................................................286
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............. 298, 300
Car Washes ......................................................329
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................... 258, 259
Cargo
Vehicle Loading .............................................99
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 104
Cargo Load Floor ................................................99
Cellular Phone
................................................. 211
Certification Label ........................................... 1
70
Chains, Tire ......................................................325
Change Oil Indicator ........................................114
Changing A Flat Tire ........................................ 262
Charging ............................................................. 15
Chart, Tire Sizing ..............................................314
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ................................................................ 128
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................... 256
Checks, Safety .................................................256
Child Restraint ................................................. 243
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................................. 245
Center Seat LATCH ..................................... 250
Child Seat Installation .......................252, 253
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .....251
Infant And Child Restraints ........................244
Lower Anchors And T
ethers For Children .. 247
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........245
Seating Positions ........................................246
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ...............255
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................... 333
Cleaning
Wheels .........................................................324
Climate Control .................................................. 75
Automatic ...................................................... 75
Manual .......................................................... 80
Rear ........................................................ 79, 83
Cold Weather Operation ..................................132
Compact Spare Tire .........................................323
Contract, Service ............................................. 342
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ....298, 300
Cooling System .......................................296, 298
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)
....................... 297
Coolant Level ..................................... 298, 301
Cooling Capacity .........................................335
Disposal Of Used Coolant ................. 298, 300
Drain, Flush, And Refill ......................297, 299
Inspection ........................ 296, 298, 299, 301
Points To Remember ..................................298
Pressure Cap ..................................... 298, 300
Radiator Cap ......................................298, 300
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....297, 299
335, 336, 338
Corrosion Protection ........................................329
Cruise Control .................................................. 147
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................... 147
Cruise Light ............................................. 126, 127
Customer Assistance ...................................... 340
Cybersecurity ................................................... 1
81
D
Daytime Running Lights .................................... 70
Dealer Service ................................................. 289
Defroster, Windshield ......................................257
346
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................................74
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................... 127
Dimmer Switch
Headlight .......................................................70
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ..................................................288
Disable Vehicle Towing ....................................280
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 298, 300
Door Ajar ................................................. 121, 122
Door Ajar Light ........................................ 121, 122
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................... 45
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ........................................... 1
79
E
Electric Brake Control System ........................ 213
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................. 212
Traction Control System ............................. 217
Electric Parking Brake .....................................136
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ....................214
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 121
Emergency Braking ......................................... 222
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .............................260
Jacking ............................................... 262, 264
Jump Starting ..................................... 274, 276
Overheating .................................................279
Towing ......................................................... 280
Emission Contr
ol System Maintenance ......... 128
Engine .............................................................. 286
Air Cleaner .................................................. 290
Block Heater ............................................... 136
Break-In Recommendations ...................... 136
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 288
Compartment ............................................. 286
Compartment Identification ...................... 286
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........................336, 338
Cooling ............................................... 296, 298
Exhaust Gas Caution .........................258, 259
Fails To Start ...............................................132
Flooded, Starting ........................................132
Fuel Requirements
..................................... 333
Oil ..................................... 289, 335, 336, 338
Oil Filler Cap ................................................286
Oil Filter .......................................................290
Oil Selection ..............................289, 335, 336
Oil Synthetic ................................................289
Overheating .................................................279
Starting ..................................... 129, 132, 133
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . 242, 282
Ethanol .............................................................333
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............................258, 259
Exhaust System ......................................258, 296
Exterior Lighting ........................................ 70, 313
Exterior Lights ..........................70, 258,
312, 313
F
FamCam System ..............................................167
Filters
Air Cleaner .................................................. 290
Air Conditioning ...........................85, 290, 292
Engine Oil ....................................................290
Engine Oil Disposal .................................... 289
FireTV ............................................................... 207
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................70, 71
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................................... 260
Turn Signals ........................70, 126, 258, 312
Flat Tire Changing ..........................262, 313, 323
Flat Tire Sto
wage ........................... 269, 313, 323
Flooded Engine Starting ................................. 132
Fluid Capacities ............................................... 335
Fluid Leaks .......................................................258
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...........................................................301
Engine Oil ....................................................288
Fluid, Brake .............................................337, 339
Fog Lights .................................................... 70, 72
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating .................... 52
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................... 45
Forward Collision Warning
.............................. 220
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................................280
Front Position Light ..........................................313
Fuel ...................................................................333
Additives ......................................................334
Clean Air ......................................................333
Ethanol ........................................................333
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................................168
Gasoline ...................................................... 333
347
11
Materials Added ......................................... 334
Methanol .....................................................333
Octane Rating ...........................333, 336, 338
Requirements ............................................. 333
Specifications .................................... 336, 338
Tank Capacity ............................................. 335
Fuses ................................................................303
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .................. 67
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .................................168
Gasoline, (Fuel)
................................................333
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................... 333
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................. 333
Gear Ranges .................................................... 140
Glass Cleaning .................................................331
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................................ 172
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ........................... 171
GVWR ................................................................170
H
Hands-Free Sliding Door ................................... 42
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water ............................. 179
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................260
Head Restraints ................................................. 61
Headlights .......................................................... 70
Cleaning ...................................................... 329
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........70
Lights On Reminder ............................... 70, 72
Passing ....................................................70, 71
Switch ............................................................ 70
Time Delay .....................................................70
Washers .........................................................72
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 64, 66
Heated Seats ..................................................... 59
Heater, Engine Block .......................................136
High Voltage Battery .......................................... 13
Hill Start Assist ................................................ 215
Hitches
Trailer Towing .............................................. 172
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) .................. 67
Hood Prop ...........................................................96
Hood Release .....................................................96
I
Ignition ................................................................29
Keyless Ignition Hybrid..................................30
Switch ............................................................ 29
Indicator Lights
Blue ............................................................. 127
Green ...........................................................126
White ........................................................... 127
Yellow .......................................................... 126
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................. 64, 260
Instrument Cluster ..................................109, 111
Display .........................................................112
Menu Items .................................................114
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .................... 330
Interior And Instrument Lights ..........................73
Interior Appearance Care ................................330
Interior Lights .....................................................73
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...................74
Inverter
Power ............................................................. 91
J
Jack Location ...................................................263
Jack Operation .................................................262
Jump Starting .......................................... 274, 276
K
Key Fob ...............................................................26
Arm The System ............................................36
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 36
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............28
Ke
y Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 27
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) .................................................................. 28
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .........................................38
Passive Entry .................................................38
Keys .................................................................... 26
348
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ......................... 70
Lane Change Assist .................................... 70, 72
LaneSense ....................................................... 163
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................... 227
Latches ............................................................ 258
Hood .............................................................. 96
Lead Free Gasoline ......................................... 333
Leaks, Fluid ......................................................258
Life Of Tires ......................................................322
Liftgate
................................................................97
Hands-Free ....................................................98
Power ............................................................. 97
Light Bulbs .............................................. 258, 313
Lights ................................................................258
Air Bag .......................................120, 234, 257
Anti Lock Brake System ............................. 123
Automatic Emergency Braking OFF ...........126
Battery Saver .................................................73
Brak
e Assist Warning ................................. 215
Brake Warning ............................................ 120
Bulb Replacement ............................. 312, 313
Cruise ................................................. 126, 127
Daytime Running .......................................... 70
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 70
Electric Power Steering Fault .....................121
Electronic Park Brake .................................123
Electronic Stability Control Active .....123, 124
Electronic Throttle Control ......................... 121
Engine Temperature Warning ....................122
Exterior ............................................... 258, 313
Fog ........................................................ 72, 126
Headlights ...............................................70, 71
High Beam .................................................. 127
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................70
Hood Open ..................................................122
Instrument Cluster ........................................70
Intensity Control ............................................73
Interior ...........................................................73
LaneSense ................................ 124, 126, 127
Liftgate Open .............................................. 122
Lights On Reminder ............................... 70, 72
Low Fuel ...................................................... 124
Low Washer Fluid ....................................... 124
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......124
Oil Pressure ................................................ 122
Oil Temperature .......................................... 122
Park ............................................................. 126
Passing ....................................................70, 71
Reading ......................................................... 73
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................123
Security Alarm ............................................ 123
Service ........................................................ 312
Service Automatic Emergency Braking ..... 124
Service AWD ................................................124
Service LaneSense .....................................125
Service Stop Start System ......................... 125
Side Marker ........................................312, 313
SmartBeams ................................................. 71
Stop Start Active .........................................126
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...............125
Traction Control ...........................................215
Transmission Temperature ........................ 123
Turn Signals ........................70, 126, 258, 312
Load Floor, Cargo ...............................................99
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ......................119
Load Shed Battery Saver On ...........................119
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............ 119
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 119
Loading Vehicle ......................................... 99, 170
Tires ............................................................. 317
Locks
Automatic Door ............................................. 37
Child Protection .............................................37
Manual ...........................................................37
Power Door .................................................... 37
Low Tire Pressure System ...............................223
Lubrication, Body .............................................293
Lug Nuts ...........................................................332
Luggage Carrier ............................................... 104
M
Maintenance ......................................................96
Maintenance Free Battery .............................. 288
Maintenance Schedule ...................................283
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) .................................................... 124, 128
Manual
Park Release ...............................................279
Service ........................................................ 343
Map/Reading Lights ..........................................73
349
11
Marker Lights, Side ......................................... 312
Media Hub ..........................................................88
Memory Seat ......................................................44
Methanol ..........................................................333
Mirrors ................................................................ 64
Automatic Dimming ...................................... 64
Exterior Folding ............................................. 66
Heated .................................................... 64, 66
Memory ......................................................... 44
Outside .......................................................... 64
Rearview ...............................................64, 260
Vanity ............................................................. 6
4
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ............................................................. 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ........................223
Mopar Parts ..................................................... 342
MP3 Control ....................................................... 88
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................. 70
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ...........................136
O
Occupant Restraints ........................................225
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .....333, 336, 338
Oil Change Indicator ........................................114
Reset ........................................................... 114
Oil Filter, Change ............................................. 290
Oil Filter, Selection ...........................................290
Oil Pressure Light ............................................ 122
Oil, Engine ......................................289, 336, 338
Capacity ...................................................... 335
Checking ..................................................... 288
Dipstick ....................................................... 288
Disposal ...................................................... 289
Filter ............................................................ 290
Filter Disposal .............................................289
Identification Logo ......................................289
Materials Added To .....................................289
Pressure Warning Light ..............................122
Recommendation ..............................289, 335
Synthetic ..................................................... 289
Viscosity ...................................................... 335
Onboard Diagnostic System ........................... 127
Operating Precautions .................................... 127
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ..........................................343
Outside Rearview Mirrors ..................................64
Overheating, Engine ........................................ 279
P
Paint Care ........................................................ 329
Parking Brake .................................................. 136
ParkSense
Front And Rear ............................................154
ParkSense Active Park Assist ......................... 160
ParkSense System, Rear .................................154
Passive Entry ......................................................38
Pedestrian Warning System ............................213
Pets ...................................................................257
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........... 317
Power
Brakes .........................................................332
Inverter .......................................................... 91
Mirrors ........................................................... 65
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 90
Seats .......................................................56, 58
Steering .......................................................145
Power Seats
Down ..............................................................56
Forward ..........................................................56
R
earward .......................................................56
Up ...................................................................56
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch ....................................... 41, 97
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................... 231
Preparation For Jacking .................................. 263
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ....................................................231
Q
Quiet Vehicle Pedestrian Module (QVPM) ......213
R
Radial Ply Tires ................................................ 321
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ... 298, 300
350
Radio Operation ...............................................211
Radio Remote Controls ................................... 203
Rear Air Conditioning ..................................79, 83
Rear Camera ....................................................165
Rear Cr
oss Path ...............................................219
Rear ParkSense System ..................................154
Rear Seat Entertainment ................................203
Rear Seat Reminder ........................................ 216
Rear View ........................................................... 64
Reclining Front Seats .........................................46
Recreational Towing ........................................ 177
Reformulated Gasoline ................................... 333
Refrigerant .......................................................292
Release, Hood ....................................................96
Reminder, Lights On .......................................... 70
Reminder, Seat Belt ........................................ 226
Remote Control
Starting System ......................................32, 34
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm .............................................. 36
Disarm The Alarm ......................................... 36
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 203
Remo
te Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ........................ 33, 35
Remote Starting System .............................32, 34
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 312
Replacement Tires .......................................... 322
Reporting Safety Defects ................................ 342
Restraints, Child .............................................. 243
Restraints, Head ................................................ 61
Roof Luggage Rack ..........................................104
Rotation, Tires ..................................................327
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......................... 257
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................... 258
Saf
ety Defects, Reporting ............................... 342
Safety Information, Tire ...................................313
Safety Tips ....................................................... 256
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................................ 258
Schedule, Maintenance ..................................283
Screen Setup ................................................... 118
Seat Belt Reminder .........................................123
Seat Belts ................................................226, 257
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................... 229
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....229
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ...................................................229
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
........... 232
Child Restraints .......................................... 243
Energy Management Feature ....................232
Extender ...................................................... 231
Front Seat .......................................... 226–228
Inspection ................................................... 257
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 228
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 228
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................... 227
Operating Instructions ............................... 228
Pregnant Women ........................................231
Pretensioners ..............................................231
Rear Seat .................................................... 227
Reminder .................................................... 226
Seat Belt Extender ......................................231
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................... 231
Untwisting Procedure .................................228
Seat Belts Maintenance
................................. 330
Seats ..................................................... 45, 56, 59
Adjustment .......................................45, 46, 56
Heated ...........................................................59
Memory ......................................................... 44
Power ...................................................... 56, 58
Rear Folding .................................................. 45
Reclining ........................................................46
Seatback Release ..................................45, 46
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) ............................. 52
Tilting ...................................................... 45, 46
Security Alarm ................................................. 123
Arm The System ............................................36
Disarm The System .......................................36
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 336, 338
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................................... 28
Service Assistance .......................................... 340
Service Contract .............................................. 342
Service Manuals ..............................................343
Shifting
Automatic Transmission .............................139
Shoulder Belts ................................................. 227
Side View Mirror Adjustment .............................64
Signals, Turn ............................70, 126, 258, 312
SmartBeams ...................................................... 71
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ..............................325
351
11
Snow Tires ....................................................... 323
Spare Tire Changing ........................................262
Spare Tire Stowage ......................................... 269
Spare Tires .....................................263, 323, 324
Specifications
Oil ....................................................... 336, 338
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................. 150
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....................... 147
Starting ............................. 32, 34, 129, 1
32, 133
Button ............................................................29
Cold Weather .............................................. 132
Engine Fails To Start .................................. 132
Remote ................................................... 32, 34
Starting And Operating ................. 129, 132, 133
Starting Procedures ...................... 129, 132, 133
Steering ............................................................145
Tilt Column .................................................... 43
Wheel, Heated .............................................. 43
Wheel, Tilt ......................................................43
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .......................203
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ............................................................203
Storage ............................................................... 85
Storage, Vehicle ................................................. 85
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats ........................52
Stow ‘n Vac .......................................................100
Streaming ........................................................ 203
Stuck, Freeing ..................................................280
Sun Roof ...................................................... 94, 96
Sunglasses Storage ...........................................86
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 235
Surround View Camera ................................... 165
Sway Control, Trailer ........................................ 2
17
Symbol Glossary ...................................................9
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................................ 289
System, Remote Starting ............................32, 34
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................... 43
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............. 84
Tilt Steering Column .......................................... 43
Time Delay
Headlight .......................................................70
Tire And Loading Information Placard ............ 317
Tire Markings ................................................... 314
Tire Safety Information ....................................313
Tire Stowage .................................................... 269
Tires .......................................258, 319, 323, 327
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................... 322
Air Pressure .................................................319
Chains ......................................................... 325
Changing .....................................................262
Compact Spare ...........................................323
General Information .......................... 319, 323
High Speed ................................................. 320
Inflation Pressure ....................................... 320
Jacking ............................................... 262, 264
Life Of Tires .................................................322
Load Capacity .....................................317, 318
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................115, 125, 223
Quality Grading ........................................... 327
Radial .......................................................... 321
Replacement .............................................. 322
Rotation .......................................................327
Safety ..................................................313, 319
Sizes ............................................................ 314
Snow Tires .................................................. 323
Spare Tires ................................263, 323, 324
Spinning ...................................................... 321
Trailer Towing ...............................................176
Tread Wear Indicators ................................ 321
Wheel Nut Torque .......................................332
To Open Hood .....................................................96
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .........................175
Towing ...................................................... 171, 177
Disabled Vehicle ......................................... 280
Guide ........................................................... 173
Recreational ................................................177
Weight ......................................................... 173
T
owing Behind A Motorhome .......................... 177
Traction .............................................................179
Traction Control ................................................217
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................... 217
Trailer Towing ...........................................171, 177
Hitches ........................................................ 172
Minimum Requirements ............................ 175
Tips .............................................................. 177
Trailer And T
ongue Weight ..........................175
Wiring ...........................................................176
352
Trailer Towing Guide ........................................ 173
Trailer Weight ................................................... 173
Transaxle
Automatic ........................................... 138, 142
Operation ........................................... 138, 1
42
Transmission ....................................................139
Automatic ...........................................139, 302
Maintenance ...............................................302
Transporting Pets .............................................257
Tread Wear Indicators ..................................... 321
Turn Signals ......................................70, 126, 312
U
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display ..182
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............. 38
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 38
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ............................327
Unleaded Gasoline ..........................................333
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....................228
USB .....................................................................88
V
Vacuum ............................................................ 100
Stow ‘n Vac ..................................................100
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................... 64
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
...............332
Vehicle Loading .......................................170, 318
Vehicle Maintenance .......................................289
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .......................9
Vehicle Storage .................................................. 85
Ventilated Seats .................................................60
W
Warning Lights
Red .............................................................. 120
Yello
w .......................................................... 123
Warning Lights And Messages ....................... 120
Washers, Windshield .......................................288
Washing Vehicle .............................................. 329
Water
Driving Through ...........................................179
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ............................ 324
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............................. 324
Wind Buffeting ................................................... 94
Window Fogging .................................................85
Windows ............................................................. 93
Power .............................................................93
Windshield Defroster .......................................257
Windshield Washers ................................. 74, 288
Fluid .............................................................288
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................293
Wipers Blade Replacement ............................ 293
Wipers, Intermittent
........................................... 74
Wireless Charging Pad ...................................... 92
Wrecker Towing ................................................280
353
11
Vehicle images are for illustration purposes only. Actual products sold may vary.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while
driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to
vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones
or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference source for common questions. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit
mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
First Edition
25_RUP_OM_EN_USC
©2024 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada
Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take
following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store
and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S
MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CANADA
U.S.
mopar.com/om
